JP6712374B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a pachinko machine, a slot machine (pachi-slot machine), and an enclosed game machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the game area of the game board is provided with a starting opening in which a game ball can be won, and a symbol display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols. , The symbols on the symbol display unit are changed for a predetermined time, and when the changed symbols are in a specific mode that is a combination of predetermined specific symbols, the variable winning means is opened for a predetermined time, which is advantageous for the player. A game state is generated (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in display.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a display feature.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is a game table provided with a game board, a display means, a transmitting means, a first light emitting means, and a second light emitting means, wherein the transmitting means. Are means provided in the game board, the display means is means provided in the game board, the display means is means provided with a display area, and the display area is A region visible to the player through a transparent region in the transparent means, the transparent region is capable of displaying a first pattern, the transparent region is capable of displaying a second pattern, The first pattern is displayed only when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second pattern is displayed only when the second light emitting means emits light. A part of the area in which one pattern is displayed overlaps with a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed, and the time when the first pattern is displayed and the second pattern are displayed. The time is another time, the game board is a board provided with effect means, the effect means is movable means, and a part of the display means is overlapped by the effect means. In some cases, the rendering means may be located at a position overlapping a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed in the transparent area, and the rendering means may be located in the transparent area. If it located in a position where the second pattern is overlapped on a part of the area to be displayed there is, the certain one region in the display area (hereinafter, referred to as "first display region".) It is possible to display a display indicating the number of reservations in the display area, and display the number of reservations in a certain one area (hereinafter, referred to as "second display area") different from the first display area in the display area. It is possible to display a display that represents, at least a portion of the first display region is a region that overlaps a portion of the region in which the first pattern is displayed, at least the first display region Part is an area that overlaps with a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed, and the second display area is an area that does not overlap with the area in which the first pattern is displayed. The second display area is an area that does not overlap the area in which the second pattern is displayed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a display feature.

3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the 1st Example of a structure of the transparent part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the game table 100 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 2nd Example of a structure of the transmissive part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the transmissive part 700 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 3rd Example of a structure of the permeation|transmission part which concerns on this invention, (a) is the schematic diagram which looked at the game board 200 from the front, (b) is AA' of (a). It is a sectional view, (c) is a BB' sectional view of (a). It is a figure which shows the 4th Example of a structure of the transmissive part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the transmissive part 700 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 5th Example of a structure of the transparent part which concerns on this invention, (a) is a schematic sectional drawing in the predetermined position of the transparent part 700, (b) is a different position from (a). 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a transparent portion 700 of FIG. It is a figure which shows the 6th Example of a structure of the transmission part which concerns on this invention, and is the schematic which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 7th Example of a structure of the transmission part which concerns on this invention, and is the schematic which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 8th Example of a structure of the transmissive part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is a front view of an example of a specific structure of the transmissive part 700. FIG. It is a perspective view of the transmission part 700 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a transmission part 700 shown in FIG. 11. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a light emitting means 701 used in the transmission part 700 shown in FIG. 11. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701e shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701e from the light emission surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the light source the upper side of the board 701e, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701e viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701f shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701f from the light emission surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701f the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701f viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701g shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701g from the light emitting surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701g the light source the upper side, FIG. 7C is a bottom view of the substrate 701g viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701h shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701h from the light emitting surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701h the light source the upper side, FIG. 7C is a bottom view of the substrate 701h viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701i shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701i from the light emitting surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701i the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701i viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701j shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701j from the light emission surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701j the light source the upper side, FIG. 7C is a bottom view of the substrate 701j viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701k shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701k from the light emission surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701k the light source the upper side, FIG. 7C is a bottom view of the substrate 701k viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state of fixing the substrate 701k to the inner glass unit frame 704b. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that the permeation|transmission member 703 is fixed to the inner side glass unit frame 704b, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part E of (a), (C) is a perspective view showing a state in which the transparent member 703 is fitted in (b). It is a figure which shows the 9th Example of a structure of the transmission part which concerns on this invention, and is the schematic which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A) is a figure which shows the 10th Example of the structure of the transparent part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the transparent part 700 from the front, (b) is the transparent part which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the 11th Example of a structure, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the permeation|transmission part 700 from the front. (A), (b) and (c) is a figure which shows another example of the light emitting part used for the transmissive part which concerns on this invention, and is a top view seen from the light emitting surface of a light source. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a display pattern in a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (c) [Fig. 3] is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. 5 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the processing in the 1st sub control part of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main processing, and (b) shows the 1st. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the first sub control unit image process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) shows the 2nd. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the success/failure determination table and special figure determination table which were memorize|stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) is a success/failure determination table used at the time of high probability. An example of a table is shown, (b) shows an example of a hit/miss determination table used at a low probability, and (c) shows an example of a special figure determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation display time determination table memorize|stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table. 9B shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice table 1 used for the notice lottery 1 memorize|stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. An example of the icon image displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area and the special figure 2 hold icon display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention is shown, and (a) shows An image showing a "circle mark", which is a hold icon displayed at the time of pre-notification of "no change", is shown, and in Fig. 8B, a "container" which is the hold icon displayed at the time of pre-reading of "hold A" is displayed. The character image shown is shown, and (c) shows the character image showing "Yoshimune", which is the hold icon displayed at the time of advance notice of "Hold B". It is a flow chart which shows special figure pre-reading processing. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a tokusatsu prefetching process and showing the process following FIG. 41. It is a flow chart of the sub side pre-reading notice execution process at the time of a start winning, which is executed at the timing when the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 is won. It is a flowchart of the variation start time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed at the timing when the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game is started. It is a figure which shows the 12th Example of a structure of the transmissive part which concerns on this invention, It is a figure of an example of a specific structure of the transmissive part 700, (a) is a front view, (b) is (a). FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern is emitted in the transmissive region of the transmissive portion 700 shown in FIG. 4C, and FIG. 8C is a diagram showing how light is emitted to the transmissive region shown in FIG. FIGS. 46A and 46B are diagrams for explaining that in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, light sources at different positions are caused to emit light so that different patterns are made to appear. FIGS. 46A and 46B are diagrams for explaining that in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, light sources at different positions are caused to emit light so that different patterns are made to appear. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the orientation of the light source and the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, (a) is a diagram showing the orientation of the light source, and (b) is a rectangle A in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows a part. In the configuration shown in FIG. 45, regarding a lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in the transmissive region, (a) is a diagram showing the pattern and the direction of the light source, and (b) is enclosed by a dashed ellipse F in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows a part. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view showing half mirror role objects 710a and 710b and blade role objects 711a and 711b from game board 200 shown in FIG. 50. It is a figure which shows the half mirror role object 710b shown in FIG. 51, (a) is a front perspective view, (b) is a rear perspective view. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52. (A) is a front view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, (b) is an AA sectional view of FIG. 54(a). It is a figure explaining the structure of the half mirror role object 710b shown in FIG. 52, (a) is an AA sectional drawing of FIG. 54 (a), (b) is arrangement|positioning of the blade role thing 711b, and is a half. It is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of the mirror accessory 710b. It is a front view explaining the structure of the half mirror accessory 710b and the blade accessory 711b shown in FIG. 50, (a) is a figure which shows the state which made LED717a, LED717b, and LED717c light-emit, (b), (C) And (d) is a figure which shows a mode that the blade accessory 711b is driven in the state which does not make LED717a, LED717b, and LED717c light-emit. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 30. It is a front view which shows the example of the shielding device 246 different from FIG. 57, and (a), (b) and (c) is a figure which shows a mode that the door of the shielding device 246 moves. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a plan view, (b) is a front view of a state where left and right LEDs are illuminated, and (c) is a top and bottom LED. Is a front view of a state of emitting light, and (d) is a front view of a state of emitting light from the left, right, and top and bottom LEDs. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a front view showing a pattern formed by lens cutting on each door, (b) is a plan view, and (c). FIG. 4 is a front view showing an arrangement of LEDs as a light source provided in a frame portion, (d) is a front view showing a state in which upper and lower LEDs provided at an end emit light, and (e) is a left and right LED and a center. It is a front view in the state which lighted up and down LED. It is a figure which shows the example of the structure which laminate|stacks a some transmissive part and performs light emission production, (a) is a front view of the state which laid flat without a several transmissive part, (b) is a several It is a perspective view of a state in which the transmissive portions are overlapped, (c) is a perspective view showing a plurality of transmissive portions in an overlapped manner with an interval being widened, and (d) shows a pattern in which a plurality of transmissive portions are stacked to produce light emission. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200 showing an embodiment in which a plurality of transmissive portions are overlapped to produce a light emission effect. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200 showing an embodiment in which a plurality of transmissive portions are overlapped to produce a light emission effect. (A)-(g) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(c) is a figure which follows FIG. 64(a)-(g), and shows a specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(e) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. FIGS. 68(a) to 68(g) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 68(a) to 68(h), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows a specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display in a decorative design display device 208, and the pattern of a transparent part in order following FIG. 70(a)-(h). FIGS. 71A to 71H are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 71A to 71H, a specific example of an effect produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. In the case where a liquid crystal display device 208i different from the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided and a general symbol fluctuation effect of a general symbol fluctuation game is performed on this liquid crystal display device 208i, it is a diagram showing the symbol and the pattern, (a) The figure shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the public figure that the public figure display device 210 stops and displays according to the result of the general figure fluctuation game, and (b) shows a liquid crystal display device according to the result of the general figure fluctuation game. It shows an example of the universal figure decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in 208i, (c) shows the correspondence between the universal figure of (a) and the universal figure decorative pattern of (b), and the lottery result of the universal figure variation game It is a figure which shows the electric charge opening pattern when each becomes, and (d) is a figure which shows the pattern of the universal figure fluctuation production|presentation which is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 208i. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the production|generation by the light emission of the pattern of a transparent part in order. 74A to 74F are views showing specific examples of the display on the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect of light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. (A)-(e) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. It is a figure explaining the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the 1st special symbol display device 212, and the 2nd special symbol display device 214, and the relationship of the pattern 703e light-emitted and displayed on the transparent member 703. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 81 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 80 viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the 13th Example of a structure of the transparent part which concerns on this invention, It is a figure of an example of a specific structure of the transparent part 700, (a) is a front view, (b) is (a). 6 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern is made to emit light in the transmissive region of the transmissive part 700 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that light is irradiated to the transmissive area shown in FIG.83(b). (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern made to differ by making a light source of a different position light-emit in the structure shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern made to differ by making a light source of a different position light-emit in the structure shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. FIGS. 83 and 84 are views for explaining the relationship between the orientation of the light source and the transmissive region in the configurations shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, (a) showing the orientation of the light source, and (b) a rectangle in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by A. In the configurations shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, regarding a lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in the transmissive region, (a) is a diagram showing the pattern and the direction of the light source, and (b) is a dashed ellipse in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by F. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(b) is a figure which follows FIG. 90(a)-(f), and is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(b) is a figure which follows FIG. 92(a)-(f), and is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by the light emission of the display in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern of a transparent part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(b) is a figure which follows FIG. 94(a)-(f), and is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern of a transparent part in order. 96(a) to 96(f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 94(a) to (f), a specific example of an effect by display and light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion on the decorative symbol display device 208. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order following FIG. 98(a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows a specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display in a decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern of a transmissive part in order following FIG. 100(a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which follows FIG. 102(a)-(f), and shows a specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. It is a figure explaining the example of the effect|action produced with the game board 200, and is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows a specific example of the effect|action by the light emission of the display in a decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern of a transmissive part in order following FIG. 105(a)-(f). (A)-(c) is a figure which follows FIG. 106(a)-(f), and shows a specific example of the effect|action by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(e) is a figure which shows a specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display in a decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern of a transmissive part in order following FIG. 107(a)-(c). (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the example of the effect|action produced with the game board 200, and is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the example of the effect|action produced with the game board 200, and is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the example of the effect|action produced with the game board 200, and is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure explaining the example of the effect|action produced with the game board 200, and is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order following FIG. 114(a)-(d). (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|generation by the light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order following FIG. 115(a)-(d). (A)-(b) is a figure which shows a specific example of the production|generation by the display in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the light emission of the pattern of a transparent part in order following FIG. 116(a)-(d). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect|action by light emission of the display and the pattern of a transparent part in the decorative pattern display device 208 in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the demonstration screen display in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the light emission of the pattern of a transparent part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the demonstration screen display in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the light emission of the pattern of a transparent part in order. (A)-(d) is a figure explaining the example of the effect|action produced with the game board 200, and is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front.

<First embodiment>
The contents and technical ideas of the first to third embodiments and the examples described in them can be combined with each other as long as there is no fundamental flaw, and three or more combinations or some configurations. Similarly, addition and deletion of can be set appropriately.

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to an embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertically-oriented rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, and a player's A ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collecting container (commonly known as a dollar box) not shown, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for launching the game board 200 into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and a chance for the opportunity button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in a game store, and a return for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. An operation button 142 and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 2, the upper portion of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located below the ball tank 150 and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is arranged, for example, so that at least a part thereof overlaps the first sub-board 160 in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the tank rail 154, which may give noise to the control board, is arranged so as to overlap the first sub-board 160 in order to save the area where the members are arranged. However, in the pachinko machine 100, when the tank rail 154 is provided with noise countermeasures, even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub-board 160 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, the pachinko machine 100 is affected by the noise of the first sub-board 160. May be mitigated. Further, since the tank rail 154 is provided with measures against noise, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thus, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is seen through to visually confirm the flow down state of the game ball on the tank rail 154. You may be able to.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and while temporarily holding the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, drive the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 from the payout passage 121 (see FIG. 1) arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 100 pays out balls to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. A power supply board including a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply and a power supply switch 178 for turning on/off the power supply by an operation of a game shop clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating 182, and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. The CR interface section 186 has a CR unit connection section 186a formed of, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface section 186 is adapted to transmit and receive signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection section 186a.

A volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided at the upper left of the drawing of the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160. The volume adjustment switch 192 is composed of, for example, a rotary switch.

The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side thereof. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when exchanging the game board 200, the game board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. It However, depending on the model, it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. Therefore, when removing the game board 200, the pachinko machine 100 is relay board 196 from the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 100. May be configured so that the connection status of can be grasped.

Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with other configurations (for example, a power cord (not shown)) that need to be connected to the outside.

The pachinko machine 100 has a power connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 when viewed from the back side thereof. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced, but at this time, the main board 156, the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-control unit 500 may also be replaced. The board 156, the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-control unit 500 may be provided on the game board 200.

Further, even when the model of the pachinko machine 100 is changed, the main body 104 may be used as it is without being replaced. At this time, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 also need to be replaced. In some cases, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 may be provided on the main body 104 because they may not exist.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is arranged substantially in the center, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a display device using EL or the like may be used. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

In the lower right of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-precision middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol is provided as the fourth decorative symbol next to the decorative symbols displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This fourth symbol is provided with two symbols, that is, the fourth symbol 219 for the special diagram 1 for the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 221 for the special symbol 2 for the special symbol 2, and the effect display area 208d (for example, Display at the bottom). The 4th pattern displays fluctuation/stop, for example, black indicates stop display, and gray indicates fluctuation display.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the regular figure fluctuation games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. It is set up.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning.

The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning port 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with blades 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blades 232a are closed, so that the figure display device 210 wins the figure variation game. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, one is provided below the center of the game board 200 and one is provided below the right of the game board 200. This variable winning a prize mouth 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 win the special figure variation game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the ball. The rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 allow the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launch the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or the starting prize. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

The parts that can contact the game ball, such as the hitting ball direction changing member 236 and the game nail 238, are the game parts that are placed in the game area and that can be contacted by the game ball that is fired.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball run by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244, which is a rolling area, the game sphere that has entered the receiving hole 244b is discharged from the discharge hole 244a, which is the discharging portion, and the discharged ball can easily enter the first special figure starting port 230. ing.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley.

The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded.

The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

<Structure of transparent area>
Here, an example of the configuration of the transmissive region according to the present invention will be described.

In the present invention, the game board 200 is provided with the game area 124, and the transparent portion provided on the front side of the game board 200 and having the transparent area that faces at least the game area 124. Light is emitted from the light emitting means to the transmissive area of the transmissive portion, and the transmissive portion is provided with direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the player side. At least the first region and the second region are provided, and the first region is brighter than the second region.

<<First Example>>
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a first embodiment of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic diagram of the gaming table 100 seen from the front.

In the first embodiment, the transparent area 700 is provided in the game area 124 of the gaming table 100, and the transparent area 700 is provided with the first area 720a and the second area 720b. In the one area 720a and the second area 720b, the light from the light emitting means is directed to the player side by the direction changing means described later in detail.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the first region 720a emits light brighter than the second region 720b.

<<Second Example>>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a second embodiment of the configuration of the transmissive portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmissive portion 700 as viewed from the front.

In the second embodiment, the light emitting means 701a and 701b for irradiating the transmissive portion 700 with light are provided on the side surface of the transmissive portion 700, and the light emitting means 701a and 701b are provided in the first region 720a and the second region 720b of the transmissive portion 700. The changing means directs the light from the light emitting means 701a and 701b to the player side.

The light emitting means 701a is provided with, for example, a light source densely (with a narrow interval), and the light emitting means 701b is provided with, for example, a light source with a rough (widened interval), whereby a light source near the light emitting means 701a is provided. The first region 720a emits bright light in a narrow region, and the second region 720b near the light emitting means 701b emits dark light in a wide region.

<<Third Example>>
6A and 6B are views showing a third embodiment of the configuration of the transmission part according to the present invention, FIG. 6A is a schematic view of the game board 200 seen from the front, and FIG. 6B is a view of FIG. It is an AA' sectional view and (c) is a BB' sectional view of (a).

In the third embodiment region 720 comprises a first region 720a and a second region 720b. The direction changing means 700a are provided at substantially equal intervals in both the first region 720a and the second region 720b (see FIGS. 6B and 6C). On the other hand, the distance from the light sources 702a and 702b to the transmission part 700 is longer in the light source 702a. Therefore, the number of light beams incident on the transmissive portion 700 is larger from 702b, and the first region 720a shown in FIG. 6C is larger than the second region 720b shown in FIG. 6B. It emits bright light.

<<Fourth Embodiment>>
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a fourth example of the configuration of the transmissive portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmissive portion 700 as viewed from the front.

In the fourth embodiment, the light source 702c (for example, LED) of the light emitting unit 701c that irradiates light to the transmission unit 700 and the light source 702d (for example, LED) of the light emitting unit 701d have different light irradiation directions.

The light emitting means 701d as the first light emitting means is provided on the first curved surface, and the light emitting means 701d as the second light emitting means is provided on the second curved surface. The second aspect includes a section D having a curvature higher than that of the first curved surface, and the light source 702c is provided in this section D, and thus emits light in a direction different from that of the light source 702d.

<<Fifth Embodiment>>
8A and 8B are views showing a fifth embodiment of the structure of the transmission part according to the present invention, FIG. 8A is a schematic sectional view of the transmission part 700 at a predetermined position, and FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a transmissive part 700 at a position different from that of FIG.

In the fifth embodiment, the arrangement interval of the direction changing means 700a in the first region 720a is smaller than the arrangement interval of the direction changing means 700b in the second region 720b. Therefore, the number of light beams whose direction can be changed by the direction changing means 700a is larger than that of light beams whose direction can be changed by the direction changing means 700b, and is shown in FIG. 8A rather than the second region 720b shown in FIG. 8B. The first region 720a emits light brighter.

<<Sixth Embodiment>>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a sixth embodiment of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic diagram of the game board 200 seen from the front.

In a predetermined area 720 of the transmissive portion 700, the direction of travel of the light from the light source 702 (not shown in FIG. 9) is changed to the player side, and a predetermined pattern is luminescently displayed. In FIG. 9, the character is displayed as the predetermined pattern, but the predetermined pattern may be various images or characters.

The area 720 has a first area 720a that emits light and emits light and a second area 720b that emits light and emit light darker than the first area 720a.

The direction changing means may not be provided in the area where the game ball 101 passes. Further, in the area where the game ball 101 passes, a direction changing means may be provided so as to shine thinner than the diameter of the game ball 101. In the area where the game sphere 101 passes, a predetermined pattern may be displayed brightly, and a direction changing means may be provided so as to illuminate thicker than the diameter of the game sphere 101 (for example, like solid coating).

As the area through which the game ball 101 passes, for example, around the launch rails 202 and 204, around the nail that the game ball 101 first hits, a starting opening (first special drawing starting opening, second special drawing starting opening, general drawing starting) It may include a mouth (called a gate or a through chucker) and a windmill (a hit ball changing member).

Even in a region where the game ball 101 does not pass (cannot pass), the direction changing means may not be provided. For example, the direction changing means may not be provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 208 provided in the game area 124, the movable object 224, or the like.

In addition, the direction changing means is in the vicinity of the area of the device that displays information about the game (for example, the area where the special figure display device, the general figure display device, the hold lamp, etc. are arranged, the area where the fourth symbol is displayed). May not be provided, and in this case, the state of the game (whether the symbol is fluctuating, is it stopped, is it on hold, is it high probability, is it a big hit, is it in the right-handed period, etc.) is always visible. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent it from affecting the progress of the game.

<<Seventh Example>>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a seventh embodiment of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic diagram of the game board 200 seen from the front.

In a predetermined area 720 of the transmissive portion 700, the direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 10) changes the traveling direction of the light from the light source 702 to the player side, and a predetermined pattern is luminescently displayed. In FIG. 10, the character is displayed as the predetermined pattern, but the predetermined pattern may be various images or characters.

The area 720 has a first area 720a that emits light and emits light and a second area 720b that emits light and emit light darker than the first area 720a.

The first region 720a may be displayed brightly because it is near the light source 702, and the second region 720b may be displayed darkly because it is far from the light source 702.

<<Eighth Embodiment>>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an eighth example of the configuration of the transmissive portion according to the present invention, and is a front view of an example of a specific configuration of the transmissive portion 700. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the transmission part 700 shown in FIG. 11. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the transmission part 700 shown in FIG.

The transmissive portion 700 makes a lens cut at a position corresponding to the above-described first region and second region, and transmits light from a side face of the transmissive member 703 that serves as a direction changing unit and a side face of the transmissive member 703. Light emitting means 701, an outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, an inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, and an outer glass unit frame 704a in which the outer glass 705 is fitted. It has an inner glass unit frame 704b into which the inner glass 706 is fitted, and each member is fixed with a screw 707 with a transparent member 703 being inserted between the outer glass 705 and the inner glass 706.

The outer glass unit frame 704a and the inner glass unit frame 704b form a glass unit frame 704. A handle 704c is provided on the top of the glass unit frame 704 so that the operator can easily carry it.

The connector 708 for supplying power to the light source (for example, LED) of the light emitting means 701 is exposed on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704.

FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a light emitting means 701 used in the transmission part 700 shown in FIG.

The light emitting means 701 is configured by disposing a plurality of substrates 701e, 701f, 701g, 701h, 701i, 701j, and 701k on which a light emitting unit, which will be described in detail later, is mounted on the outer periphery of the transparent member 703. Depending on the outer peripheral shape of the transparent member 703, a long substrate (for example, the substrate 701f) can be arranged at a portion having a small curvature, and a portion having a large curvature is between a predetermined substrate and another substrate (for example, the substrate). 701k and the substrate 701e). A rigid substrate may be used for the plurality of substrates 701e to 701k, and a flexible substrate may be used.

The electric circuit on the substrate that supplies power to the light source may be a circuit in which a plurality of light sources (for example, LEDs) are connected in series.

15: is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701e shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701e from the light emitting surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701e the light source the upper side. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701e viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701e has three light sources 702e1, 702e2 and 702e3, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. The connector 708e that supplies power to the light sources 702e1 to 702e3 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701e and directly below the light source 702e3.

16 is a diagram showing the substrate 701f shown in FIG. 14, (a) is a plan view of the substrate 701f as seen from the light emitting surface of the light source, and (b) is a side view of the substrate 701f with the light source on the upper side. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701f viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701f has six light sources 702f1, 702f2, 702f3, 702f4, 702f5 and 702f6, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. The connector 708f that supplies power to these light sources 702f1 to 702f6 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701f and directly below the light source 702f1.

The substrate 701f has a screw hole 709f at one end for screwing to the glass unit frame 704. The shape of the screw hole 709f is wide (widened in the longitudinal direction of the substrate 701f) so that the position where the substrate 701f is fixed may be displaced when the substrate 701f is curved and fixed to the glass unit frame 704. ..

17 is a diagram showing the substrate 701g shown in FIG. 14, (a) is a plan view of the substrate 701g seen from the light emitting surface of the light source, and (b) is a side view with the light source on the upper side of the substrate 701g. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701g viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701g has four light sources 702g1, 702g2, 702g3 and 702g4, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. A connector 708g for supplying power to these light sources 702g1 to 702g4 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701g and between the light sources 702g2 and 702g3.

The substrate 701g has a screw hole 709g at one end for screwing to the glass unit frame 704. The shape of the screw hole 709g is wide (widened in the longitudinal direction of the substrate 701g) so that the position where the substrate 701g is fixed may be displaced when the substrate 701g is curved and fixed to the glass unit frame 704. ..

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the substrate 701h shown in FIG. 14, in which (a) is a plan view of the substrate 701h seen from the light emitting surface of the light source, and (b) is a side view of the substrate 701h with the light source on the upper side. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701h viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701h has four light sources 702h1, 702h2, 702h3 and 702h4, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. A connector 708h for supplying power to these light sources 702h1 to 702h4 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701h and directly below the light source 702h2.

The substrate 701h has a screw hole 709h at one end for screwing to the glass unit frame 704. The shape of the screw hole 709h is wide (widened in the longitudinal direction of the substrate 701h) so that the position where the substrate 701h is fixed may be displaced when the substrate 701h is curved and fixed to the glass unit frame 704. ..

19: is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701i shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701i from the light emitting surface of a light source, (b) is a side view which made the light source the upper side of the board 701i. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701i viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701i has six light sources 702i1, 702i2, 702i3, 702i4, 702i5 and 702i6, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. A connector 708i for supplying power to these light sources 702i1 to 702i6 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701i between one end of the substrate 701i and the light source 702i1. At one end of the substrate 701i, a long region where no light source is arranged is secured.

The substrate 701i has a screw hole 709i for screwing to the glass unit frame 704 at the other end. The shape of the screw hole 709i is wide (widened in the longitudinal direction of the substrate 701i) so that the position where the substrate 701i is fixed may be displaced when the substrate 701i is curved and fixed to the glass unit frame 704. ..

20 is a diagram showing the substrate 701j shown in FIG. 14, in which (a) is a plan view of the substrate 701j as seen from the light emitting surface of the light source, and (b) is a side view with the light source on the upper side of the substrate 701j. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701j viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701j has four light sources 702j1, 702j2, 702j3 and 702j4, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. A connector 708j for supplying power to these light sources 702j1 to 702j4 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701j between the light sources 702j1 and 702j2.

21: is a figure which shows the board|substrate 701k shown in FIG. 14, (a) is the top view which looked at the board|substrate 701k from the light emission surface of a light source, (b) is the side view which made the board|substrate 701k the light source the upper side. And (c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701k viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

The substrate 701k has four light sources 702k1, 702k2, 702k3 and 702k4, which are arranged at substantially equal intervals. A connector 708k for supplying power to these light sources 702k1 to 702k4 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 701k between the light sources 702k1 and 702k2.

FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing how the substrate 701k is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b.

A claw portion 701kaa for fixing one end of the substrate 701k is provided at a predetermined position of the inner glass unit frame 704b, and one end of the substrate 701k is hooked on the claw portion 701kaa and the other end of the substrate 701k is fixed to the ceiling of the fixing member 701kb. It is placed on the surface portion 701ka1 and the fixing member 701kb is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b with the screw 701kc. As a result, the other end of the substrate 701k is fixed by being sandwiched between the inner glass unit frame 704b and the fixing member 701kb.

23A and 23B are perspective views showing a state in which the transparent member 703 is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b, FIG. 23A is a perspective view, and FIG. 23B is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion E of FIG. It is a figure and (c) is a perspective view showing the state where penetration member 703 was inserted in (b).

In the transmissive portion 700, the outer glass unit frame 704a and the inner glass unit frame 704b are opened, for example, by relatively rotating about one end as an axis, and the transmissive member 703 sandwiched therebetween is easily replaceable. There is.

The inner glass unit frame 704b has a protrusion 703aa at a predetermined position, and the transparent member 703 has a notch 703a at a position corresponding to the protrusion 703aa.

When the transparent member 703 is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b, the protrusion 703aa is provided, and the transparent member 703 fits the protrusion 703aa and the notch 703a. This may improve the ease of removing the transparent member 703 from the inner glass unit frame 704b. A plurality of combinations of the protruding portion 703aa and the cutout portion 703a may be provided on the outer periphery of the transmissive member 703. In FIG. 23, two locations are provided diagonally above.

<<Ninth Embodiment>>
FIG. 24 is a view showing a ninth embodiment of the configuration of the transmission part according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the game board 200 as seen from the front.

In a predetermined area 720 of the transmissive portion 700, light from a light source (not shown in FIG. 24) is changed to a player side by a direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 24) to emit a predetermined pattern. indicate. In FIG. 24, as a predetermined pattern, a gray portion such as a character of “Yoshimune” or a frame around the character is displayed by light emission.

The area of the area 720 to be displayed as a light emission can be, for example, a location where the game ball does not pass, but the location where the game ball passes is also passed by the game ball when there is only a possibility of heading to the outlet 240. In some cases, the area to be illuminated may be the area to be illuminated.

<<Tenth Example>>
FIG. 25(a) is a diagram showing a tenth embodiment of the configuration of the transmissive portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmissive portion 700 as seen from the front.

In this embodiment, in the predetermined area 720 of the transmission part 700, the direction of travel of the light from the light source 702 is changed by the direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 25A) to the player side and a predetermined pattern is formed. Is lit up. In FIG. 25( a ), the letters “heat” and the star marks around the letters are luminescently displayed as a predetermined pattern.

The light source 702 is arranged at a position near the predetermined area 720 (lower portion in FIG. 25A) and at a position facing the light source 702 (upper portion in FIG. 25A).

<<Eleventh Embodiment>>
FIG. 25B is a diagram showing an eleventh embodiment of the configuration of the transmissive portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmissive portion 700 as seen from the front.

In this embodiment, in the predetermined area 720 of the transmission part 700, the direction of the light from the light source 702 (not shown in FIG. 25B) is changed to the player side by a predetermined pattern. Is lit up. In FIG. 25( b ), the letters “heat” and the star marks around the letters are luminescently displayed as a predetermined pattern.

In this embodiment, the light sources 702 are arranged substantially evenly on the entire outer periphery of the transmissive portion 700, and correspond to the case where the predetermined region 720 extends over the entire transmissive portion 700. However, even when the light sources 702 are arranged substantially evenly, the predetermined pattern does not always emit light evenly due to the outer shape of the transmissive portion, the difference in the distance from the light source 702 to the pattern, and the like.

<Another configuration example of the light emitting means>
26(a), (b) and (c) are diagrams showing another example of the light emitting section used in the transmitting section according to the present invention, and are plan views seen from the light emitting surface of the light source.

In the example of FIG. 26A, the light sources 702m1, 702m2 and 702m3 are arranged on the substrate 701m.

In the example of FIG. 26B, the light sources 702n1, 702n2, 702n3 and 702n4 are arranged on the substrate 701n.

In the example of FIG. 26C, the light sources 702p1, 702p2, 702p3 and 702p4 are arranged on the substrate 701p.

The arrangement of each light source may be one row, or may be a plurality of rows as shown in FIGS. 26(a), (b) and (c). Although the light sources are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction with respect to each substrate, the light sources are not necessarily limited to this, and the light sources may be arranged in a slightly oblique direction toward the substrates.

<Application to slot machines>
The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal winning combination lottery) for judging the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the internally won combination. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a game medium for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined prize mode In addition to the payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing the medium payout processing, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and this production means places a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. A launching device 1014 for launching, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detecting means 1018 for detecting a ball entering the winning opening 1016, and a detecting means 1018 detecting the ball. In the case of doing, a payout means 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a shutter 1024 movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, and a predetermined operation mode And a movable body 1026 which is provided, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 1022 causes the variable display device 102 to change and stop the display and produce a game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000".

<Application to enclosed game machines>
The gaming table according to the present invention is also applicable to an enclosed gaming machine that circulates and uses gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Second embodiment>
Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertically-oriented rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, and a player's A ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collecting container (commonly known as a dollar box) not shown, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for launching the game board 200 to the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 30) by the player's operation, and an opportunity for causing the opportunity button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in a game store, and a return for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. An operation button 142 and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

FIG. 29 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 28 viewed from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 29, the upper portion of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward and is located below the ball tank 150 and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is arranged, for example, so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the first sub-board 160 in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the tank rail 154, which may give noise to the control board, is arranged so as to overlap the first sub-board 160 in order to save the area where the members are arranged. However, in the pachinko machine 100, when the tank rail 154 is provided with noise countermeasures, even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub-board 160 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, the pachinko machine 100 is affected by the noise of the first sub-board 160. May be mitigated. Further, since the tank rail 154 is provided with measures against noise, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thereby, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is seen through to visually confirm the flow down state of the game ball on the tank rail 154. You may be able to.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and while temporarily holding the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, drive the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 from the payout passage 121 (see FIG. 28) arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 100 pays out balls to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. A power supply board including a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply and a power supply switch 178 for turning on/off the power supply by an operation by a game shop clerk, and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. The CR interface section 186 has a CR unit connection section 186a formed of, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface section 186 is adapted to transmit and receive signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection section 186a.

A volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided at the upper left of the drawing of the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160. The volume adjustment switch 192 is composed of, for example, a rotary switch.

The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side thereof. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when exchanging the game board 200, the game board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. It However, depending on the model, it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. Therefore, when removing the game board 200, the pachinko machine 100 is relay board 196 from the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 100. May be configured so that the connection status of can be grasped.

Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with other configurations (for example, a power cord (not shown)) that need to be connected to the outside.

The pachinko machine 100 has a power connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 when viewed from the back side thereof. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced, but at this time, the main board 156, the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-control unit 500 may also be replaced. The board 156, the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-control unit 500 may be provided on the game board 200.

Further, even when the model of the pachinko machine 100 is changed, the main body 104 may be used as it is without being replaced. At this time, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 also need to be replaced. In some cases, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 may be provided on the main body 104 because they may not exist.

FIG. 30 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is arranged substantially in the center, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a display device using EL or the like may be used. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

In the lower right of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-precision middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol is provided as the fourth decorative symbol next to the decorative symbols displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This fourth symbol is provided with two symbols, that is, the fourth symbol 219 for the special diagram 1 for the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 221 for the special symbol 2 for the special symbol 2, and the effect display area 208d (for example, Display at the bottom). The 4th pattern displays fluctuation/stop, for example, black indicates stop display, and gray indicates fluctuation display.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the regular figure fluctuation games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. It is set up.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning.

The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning port 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with blades 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blades 232a are closed, so that the figure display device 210 wins the figure variation game. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, one is provided below the center of the game board 200 and one is provided below the right of the game board 200. This variable winning a prize mouth 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 win the special figure variation game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the ball. The rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 allow the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launch the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or the starting prize. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

The parts that can contact the game ball, such as the hitting ball direction changing member 236 and the game nail 238, are the game parts that are placed in the game area and that can be contacted by the game ball that is fired.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball run by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244, which is a rolling area, the game sphere that has entered the receiving hole 244b is discharged from the discharge hole 244a, which is the discharging portion, and the discharged ball can easily enter the first special figure starting port 230. ing.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The shielding device 246 includes left doors 246a and 246b and right doors 246c and 246d, and is arranged on the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 57, the left door 246a and the right door 246c have a moving mechanism 246e that can move the left door 246a and the right door 246c in the left-right direction.

Each of the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 57, but is configured by providing a transparent transmission portion inside the opaque frame portion.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 and a second sub control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 (in this circuit, a random number value generation circuit 318 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. Drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210 A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the drive circuit 326 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is similarly latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 included in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like, which is a pachinko machine. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Note that the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and bidirectionally transmits signals such as commands between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured to be transmittable.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection for detecting each press of a chance button 136 and each button provided in the setting operation unit 139. A sensor 426, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and a signal from the CPU 404. By connecting the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 to the VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. There is. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 502 is for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224 and the ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored. Control of the drive circuit 516, the effect movable body sensor 424 which detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the sensor circuit 518 which outputs the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and the game board lamp 532. Game board lamp drive circuit 530 for performing, game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, game board lamp drive circuit 530 and game underframe lamp drive circuit It is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 which controls lighting by serial communication.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 32A to 32C, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed in a stopped state. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described.

FIG. 32(a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all the seven segments are turned on and one central segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variable time in the present embodiment) elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present embodiment) has passed, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as a symbol variable display. As will be described later, the variable display of symbols may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

In FIG. 32(a), 10 types of special drawings from "Special drawing A" to "Special drawing J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 32(a), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special drawing A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and “Special drawing B” is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the electric power support state (sometimes referred to as a time saving state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the electric support state is referred to as a high probability state of the universal figure, and the state not transitioning to the low state of support of the universal state is referred to as a low probability state of the universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Tokuzoku A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Tokuzoku B" is the special symbol low probability general symbol high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

"Special map C" is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, “Special drawing C” is 2R, which is different from “Special drawing A” which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, “Special drawing D” is 2R as compared with “Special drawing B” which is 15R. “Special map E” is a 2R big hit symbol called hidden probability change, and is in a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These “special map E” and “special map F” are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the electric support state. In addition, "special map E" and "special map F", when the state of the universal map at the time of a big hit is the universal figure high probability state, the game state of the universal figure after the big hit is the universal figure high probability state Therefore, it is configured so that it does not happen that the electric power support state ends due to a big hit.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the game state when a small hit occurs. For example, if the gaming state at the time of a small hit is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, after the small hit is also the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, and the game state when the small hit is If the special map low probability general figure low probability state, it will be the special map low probability general figure low probability state even after the small hit ends. The small hit mentioned here shows almost the same attacker behavior as the big hit without 2R electric support. That is, the “special drawing G” and the “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing E” and the “special drawing F”, and the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also the same mode. It is possible to expect that the game state of the special map has shifted to a high probability.

In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, which is a symbol in which the advantage to the player is relatively small. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a deficit in the hit determination, and then, based on the result of the hit determination, After the variable display of the symbols, it is configured to determine which of the "special figure A" to the "special figure J" is to be stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display device 212, 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, special figure probability change state). The presence/absence of electricity and the presence/absence of electrical support) are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery, for example, in addition to the determination of the stop symbol. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the big hit game when the stop symbol is determined, for example, and determines the profit state after the big hit game by lottery, such as the stop symbol, the number of rounds, and The profit status may be appropriately associated with each other.

FIG. 32B shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The special starting point 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 is a ball, that is, the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. In the following drawings, "variable display of decorative design" may be indicated by an arrow, but in practice, the decorative design to be displayed may be switched in this way.

When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A" or the 15R big jackpot of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1- "Decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", a pattern combination in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7") -Decoration 7", etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, 2T big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, suddenly called 2R big hit of "special figure F", or 1st small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special figure C" suddenly changed or a 2R big hit called "special figure D" suddenly shortened, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “special drawing I” and the second deviation of “special drawing J”, stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 32(b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 32(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 repeats the illumination of all seven segments and the illumination of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 32C, the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments to be turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

In step 10101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows operation and sets initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step 10103 following step 10101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step 10105 following step 10103, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies the voltage value of the power supply from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 to a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), the process returns to step 10103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff), the step is performed. Proceed to 10107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step 10103, and step 10105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step 10107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines the period for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below at regular intervals, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1 output port to sub-control unit 400), a process of outputting a clear signal, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step 10109, which follows step 10107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power was cut off (before the power is cut off). When it is set to the initial state, the process proceeds to the initialization process (step 10113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the game store clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step 10113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is the information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step 10113 to initialize the basic circuit 302, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step 10111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step 10113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step 10113.

In step 10111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step 10115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step 10111, the power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step 10233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

At step 10113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this time, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step 10113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step 10233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step 10115, which is subsequent to step 10113, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined to be a big hit by the hit determination of whether it is a big hit or not, a random number value for hit special symbol determination used for lottery to determine the stop symbol in the special symbol fluctuation game is generated. A random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure for hitting (hereinafter, referred to as "random number counter for generating initial value corresponding to random number for determining special figure for hitting"). ) Is updated. Also, a random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of the universal figure winning random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value used for determining whether or not the universal figure variation game is won (hereinafter, referred to as "the universal figure winning random number counter. The random number counter for initial value generation") is updated. For example, assuming that the range of numerical values that can be taken as the random number for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, a value is stored from the random number counter storage area for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for determining special figure for hitting in the RAM 308. The value is acquired, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the universal figure winning random number counter is similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counters corresponding to the hit special figure determining random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter are also updated in step 10207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step 10115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main controller 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main controller timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step 10201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step 10203 following step 10201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (processing abnormality is not detected). The restart is performed periodically (in this embodiment, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

In step 10205 following step 10203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In step 10205, the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and current detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in step 10205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 31, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal) is stored. In step 10205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). If there is a match with (the information indicating that there is), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the passing through the universal figure starting opening 228. Judge that there was. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before two times, no detection signal before, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In step 10207 following step 10205 and step 10209 subsequent thereto, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process of step 10207, the initial value generating random number counters corresponding to the hit special symbol determining random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter, which are performed in step 10115, are updated. In the basic random number updating process in step 10209, the hit special symbol determining random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter used in the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as the random number for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, the random number counter for determining special figure for hitting provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number for determining special figure for hitting is provided. Value is obtained, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in the original hit special figure determination random number counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number for determining special drawing for hitting. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the hitting special figure determining random number counter makes one round, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the hitting special figure determining random number counter The value of is acquired and is set in the random number counter for determining the special drawing for hitting. For example, the value obtained from the random number counter for determining the special figure for hitting that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for determining special figure for hitting, and the special value for hitting is obtained. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number for figure determination and determine that the random number for special figure determination for hitting has completed one round. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for determining special characters for hitting has made one round, an initial value for determining that the random number counter for general figure winning has made one round. A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The random number counter for determining the special figure for hit may be separately provided with a counter for obtaining a random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for obtaining a random value for special figure 2. Counter may be used.

In step 10211 following step 10209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure timer number deciding random number counter for generating the special figure timer number deciding random number value for deciding the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game is updated. Moreover, the random number counter for determining the universal figure timer number for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the universal figure variation game is updated.

In step 10213 following step 10211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and the time for changing/stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change/stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for measuring the closing time, the predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

In step 10215, which is subsequent to step 10213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a prize ball number storage area for each prize hole or for each starting hole. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In step 10217, which is subsequent to step 10215, a prize winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step 10205.

When there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random number value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 of 318 is acquired and provided in the RAM 308. The random number for determining the special figure for hitting is acquired from the random number for determining special figure for hitting and stored in the random number storage area for special figure in the order of acquisition. A combination of a random number value for hit determination and a random value for determining special character for hitting in a special figure 1 random number value storage area (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 set of random number values" or "special figure 1 starting information"). Yes) is stored by the same number as the number of special figure 1 reservations stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 1 random value group with the highest holding order (the earliest and stored in the oldest) each time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. It is erased and processed so that the retention order of the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number set is incremented by one. Also, as the number of special figure 1 reserved numbers increases by one, a new special figure 1 random number value group data is added to the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. Written.

If there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit A random number for hit determination generated by subjecting a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special opening 2 of FIG. 318 to a hit determination random value provided in the RAM 308. The random number for determining the special figure for hitting is obtained from the random number for determining figure and stored in the special figure 2 random number storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of a random number value for hit determination and a special value determination for hitting special figure in the special figure 2 random number value storage area (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 set of random number values" or "special figure 2 start information"). Yes) is stored by the same number as the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 random number set with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. It is processed so that the reservation order of the data of the group is increased by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 reservations is increased by one, a new set of special figure 2 random number values is written in the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 2 random number value group having the lowest reservation order.

When there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value and handled. Stored in the universal figure random value storage area. When there is a prize in the variable winning port 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

In step 10219 following step 10217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step 10221 following step 10219, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state updating process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

In addition, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the public figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the display mode of FIG. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is set in the setting area. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 32(c)) and the deviating symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 32(c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds (ms)), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

If the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening/closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the general figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general area non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out of alignment, the universal figure per hit flag is turned off, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process in the case where the universal figure is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step 10223.

In step 10223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of the general figure fluctuation game that is held. When is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unwinned by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. When the hit determination is performed and the winning is determined, the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no winning, the universal figure flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and this variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step 10224, which follows step 10223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. Special figure pre-reading processing, when there is a prize in special figure 1 starting mouth 230 or special figure 2 starting mouth 232, pre-reads the starting information which relates to the increase which is due to winning, the special figure fluctuation game stop design and the like Preliminary determination is made prior to the determination of win/fail in the related lottery process.

The special figure prefetching process in step 10224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special diagram prefetching process, and FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special diagram prefetching process, showing the process following FIG. 41.

41. First, in step 11101 of FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the current control state is electric power support, and when it is determined that electric power support is being performed (step 11101: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232. If it is determined (step 11103) that there is a winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 (step 11103: Yes), the random number for hit determination and the special figure for hitting according to the special figure 2 starting information that has won the prize. The random number value for determination is prefetched, and the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the random number value for pre-determined hit determination, and FIG. 37A are prior to the success/failure determination in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229 of FIG. 34). Alternatively, by using the win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 37(b), it is preliminarily determined whether or not the win/loss determination is a big hit (step 11105), and if it is a big hit (step 11105: Yes), go to step 11107. If it is a small hit (step 11105: No, step 11111: Yes), the process proceeds to step 11113. If it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (step 11105: No, step 11111: No), the process proceeds to step 11115.

Next, in step 11107, step 11113, and step 11115, the pre-reading random number value for hitting special figure determination and the special figure determining table shown in FIG. 37(c) are used to stop and display after the special figure 2 variation game. The design (stop design) is determined in advance.

Next, in step 11109, the stop time determined in advance, the random number value for determining the special figure timer number, and the special figure 2 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. 38(b) are used to change the variation time of the special figure variation game. (Special timer number) is determined in advance. Next, the pre-judgment result (preferred/non-judgment result, stop symbol, special drawing timer number) obtained by the preliminary judgment is stored in the special drawing 2 pre-reading result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. To do. The main control unit 300 is configured to store the stop symbol and the special diagram timer number of the special figure 2 variable game that have been preliminarily determined as the special figure 2 preread result in the earliest empty area of the special figure 2 preread result storage section. There is. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four special figure 2 pre-reading results.

Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 preread number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 preread results stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit as the special figure 2 preread number. The main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 pre-reading result information to the next rank of the special figure 2 pre-reading result information having the lowest (last) rank each time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results increases by one. Note that in the present embodiment, the prefetching process is performed only for the increase of the holding, but the special figure prefetching process may be performed for all the holdings every time.

41. If it is determined in step 11101 of FIG. 41 that the current control state is not electric support (step 11101: Yes), the process proceeds to FIG. 42 and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 (step 11117), if it is determined that there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 (step 11117: Yes), the hit determination random number value and the hit special figure determining random number value related to the winning special figure 1 start information are prefetched. However, prior to the success/failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231 in FIG. 34), the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pre-read random number for hit determination, and FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 37(b). Using the win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 11, pre-determination is performed as to whether or not the win/win determination is a big hit (step 11119). If it is a big hit (step 11119: Yes), the process proceeds to step 11121, and if it is a small hit If (step 11119: No, step 11125: Yes), the process proceeds to step 11127, and if neither a big hit nor a small hit (step 11119: No, step 11125: No), the process proceeds to step 11129.

Then, in step 11121, step 11127, and step 11129, the pre-reading random number value for hitting special figure determination and the special figure determining table shown in FIG. 37(c) are used to stop display after the special figure 1 variation game. The design (stop design) is determined in advance.

Next, in step 11123, the stop time determined in advance, the random number value for determining the special figure timer number, and the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. 38(a) are used to change the variation time of the special figure variation game. (Special timer number) is determined in advance. Next, the pre-judgment result (preferred/non-judgment result, stop symbol, special drawing timer number) obtained by the preliminary judgment is stored in the special drawing 1 pre-reading result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. To do. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined stop symbol of the special figure 1 variation game and the special figure timer number as the special figure 1 prefetch result in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage section. There is. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four special figure 1 pre-reading results.

Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 1 preread number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 preread results stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit as the special figure 1 preread number is provided. Every time the number of special figure 1 prefetch results is increased by 1, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information to the next order of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result information. Note that in the present embodiment, the prefetching process is performed only for the increase of the holding, but the special figure prefetching process may be performed for all the holdings every time.

Note that the special drawing prefetching process is executed by referring to the hit/miss determination table and the special drawing determination table used at the time of hit determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetch processing.

Further, in this special figure pre-reading process, a command (for example, a pre-reading result information command or a pre-reading advance notice command) based on the result of the special figure pre-reading process is set in the transmission information storage area.

Next, returning to the description of FIG. 34, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed. Perform (step 10225). This special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following plural (nine in this example) processing according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special figure 2, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is used. Re-store it in the number-of-holds storage area. At the same time, turning on/off of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 30 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from left to right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

In addition, for example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. The lighting/light-off drive control is performed by repeatedly turning the light off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step 10233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the normal figure. Probability variation flags are provided for each. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 32(a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is a special map B, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, public figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is off, the universal figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure F, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on The 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on so that the special figure I is in the case of the first deviation flag being on and the special figure J is in the case of the second deviation flag being on. -Extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit design (special figure B), sudden probability variation design (special figure C), sudden shortening design (special figure D) ), hidden probability variation pattern (special map E), suddenly normal pattern (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first off pattern (special map I) ), and the fixed display of any one of the second outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 stop time management provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 fluctuating game. Further, if the number of electric support stored in the number of electric support (details described later) storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of electric support, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in the command setting transmission processing (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening/closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the electric support frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the RAM 308 is also set. Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the number of power support times is set in the power support frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned on. The electric power support state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of universal figure (normal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the universal variation game. In addition, in the general figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The game state due to these uncertain changes in general figures, short changes in general figures, and the spread of electric Chu are collectively called electric support (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the deviation flag is ON, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), The special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step 10227.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process) is performed (step 10227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in steps 10225 and 10227 is completed, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process (special diagram 2 related lottery process) for the special diagram 2 is performed first (step 10229), and then the special diagram related lottery process for the special diagram 1 (special diagram 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step 10231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special map 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, when the number of special game 2 variable game holding is greater than 0, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the special figure 1 variable game holding are not performed. The notification of the jackpot determination result of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, and the special lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is notified. 1 is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the winning opening 230.

In the case of special figure 2 related lottery processing (step 10229), a set of special figure 2 random number values is acquired from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random number storage area and acquired. With respect to the hit determination random number value in the set of special figure 2 random number values, refer to the hit/miss determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 37(b) to make a big hit or a small hit. Or whether it should be off. Then, the main control unit 300, when the hit determination result is a big hit or a small hit, the special control shown in FIG. The design (stop design) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 is determined with reference to the drawing determination table. Although details will be described later, if the hit/miss determination result is off, a random symbol value for off symbol determination is acquired separately, and the stop symbol is referred to with reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 37(c) for the random number value. To decide.

After extracting the earliest set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number storage area, the special figure 2 random number value set in the special figure 2 random number storage area is cleared and the special figure 2 Decrement the number of reservations by one. At this time, the set of special figure 2 random number values extracted from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, The above determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

The special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231) is also the same as the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229), and therefore its explanation is omitted.
In step 10233 following step 10231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data contains the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure relation. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, including the special figure timer number selected in the lottery process, including the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., the winning effect command and the end effect start In the case of a command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a big hit round number designating command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

In the prefetch result information command, the prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the command data (prefetched stop symbol information) and the prefetched stop symbol correspond to the number of reservations. And the number-of-holding-pieces information indicating whether or not there is a hold. The prefetch result information and the pending number information in the prefetch result information command may be only the increment, or may include the prefetch result information and the pending number information for all pending.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related that are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the special figure timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information and the special figure probability variation flag output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening opening transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. Further, in this step 10233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step 10235 following step 10233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step 10237 following step 10235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 10205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the universal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step 10219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step 10239 following step 10237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step 10243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step 10241. In step 10241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step 10201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step 10243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

First, in step 10301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, first, in step 10301, initialization processing is executed. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input/output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

In step 10303 following step 10301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step 10305. .. In step 10305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step 10307 following step 10305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step 10309 following step 10307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step 10307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step 10311 subsequent to step 10309, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step 10309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

In step 10313, which follows step 10311, if the effect data read in step 10309 contains an instruction to VDP 434, this instruction is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

In step 10315, which follows step 10313, if the effect data read in step 10309 contains an instruction to sound source IC 416, this instruction is output to sound source IC 416.

In step 10317, which follows step 10315, if the effect data read in step 10309 contains an instruction to various lamps 418, this instruction is output to drive circuit 420.

In step 10319 following step 10317, if the effect data read in step 10309 contains an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step 10321 following step 10319, if the effect data read in step 10309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step 10303. ..

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step 10401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle. In step 10501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step 10303 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step 10303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step 10503 following step 10501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step 10321 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update process of other effect random number values, and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step 10313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step 10601, a transfer instruction of image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step 10603 following step 10601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step 10605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for incoming signal. In step 10605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step 10601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step 10607 following step 10605, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step 10609 following step 10607, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step 10611, and otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step 10611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

The processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step 10701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step 10701. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input/output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step 10703 following step 10701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing shifts to step 10705. .. In step 10705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step 10707 following step 10705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

In step 10709, which follows step 10707, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step 10707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step 10711 following step 10709, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step 10713 following step 10711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step 10703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step 10801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step 10901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step 10703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step 10703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step 10903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40.

First, a win/loss determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 37 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 37(a) and 37(b) show the success/failure determination process of special figure 2 or special figure 1 in special figure 2 or special figure 1 related lottery processing (steps 10229, 10231) of the main controller timer interrupt processing. It shows an example of a win/loss determination table used. FIG. 37(a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 37(b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability.

In the win/loss determination table shown in FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b), the items of "special figure probability" in the first column from the left, "random number range" in the second column, and "win/success result" in the third column. It is composed of.

The "high probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 37(a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The "random number range" is divided into four numbers, 0 to 10000, 10001 to 11638, 11639 to 11940, and 11941 to 65535. In the 3rd column, “hit result”, “high probability” and numerical values 0 to 10000, “defect” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 11941 to 65535, and “big hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10001 to 11638, “Small hits” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 11639 to 11940.

"Low probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 37(b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The "random number range" is divided into four numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 10162, numbers 10163 to 10464, and numbers 10465 to 65535. In the third column, the “winning result” is “low probability” and the numbers 0 to 10000 and the numbers 10465 to 65535 are assigned “out”, and the numbers 10001 to 10162 are assigned “big hit”. "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10163 to 10464.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is for the obtained hit determination in order to determine whether the result of the variation game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is to be won (hit) or to be unwinned (lost). The success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure determination table for the random number value. For example, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of win/loss shown in FIG. 37(a) from the ROM 306 when the gaming state at the time of winning/loss determination is the special figure high probability state, and the gaming state at the time of winning/loss determination is special. In the case of the low probability state shown in FIG. 37, the low probability table for win/fail determination shown in FIG. 37( b) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to respectively.

FIG. 37(c) shows a special symbol determination table used to determine the symbols to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation ends. The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 37(c) is composed of items from the left column, "results determination result", "range of random number of symbols", and "stop symbol". The "right/wrong judgment result" in the left column is divided into "big hit", "small hit", and "outside hit". "Big hit" indicates a case where "big hit" is judged as a result of the hit/miss judgment using the special figure hit/miss judgment table shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 37(b), and "small hit" is hit/miss of the special drawing As a result of the hit/miss judgment using the judgment table, a case where it is judged as "small hit" is shown, and "departure" indicates a case where it is judged as "departure" as a result of the hit/miss judgment using the special figure hit/miss judgment table. Shows.

The item “range of symbol random numbers” in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 37(c) is a random number value to be compared with the obtained random number value for hitting special figure 1 or special figure 2 or a random value for deviating symbol decision. It shows the range. The "range of symbol random numbers" corresponds to the item "big hit" in the "right/wrong judgment result" in the left column, and is 0 to 49, 50 to 69, 70 to 77, 78 to 83, 84 to 91 and It is divided into six numbers 92 to 99, and is divided into two numbers 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to "small hits", and the numbers 0 to 49 and number are corresponding to "off." It is divided into two, 50 to 99.

The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 37(c) represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. The "stop symbol" corresponds to "big hit" and "special symbol A" corresponding to the numerical value range 0 to 49, "special symbol B" corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 69, and numeric value 70 to 77. "Special drawing C", "Special drawing D" corresponding to numerical values 78 to 83, "Special drawing E" corresponding to numerical values 84 to 91, "Special drawing F" corresponding to numerical values 92 to 99 Each pattern mode is assigned. In addition, "stop symbol" is "small hit" and the range of the symbol random numbers is "special symbol G" corresponding to numerical values 0 to 49, and the stop symbol aspect of "special symbol H" corresponding to numerical values 50 to 99 is Each is assigned. Further, the "stop symbol" is "off" and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 49, "special symbol I", and the numerical symbols 50 to 99 correspond to "special symbol J". It is assigned.

As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is configured such that the special circuit 1 display device 212 or the special circuit 1 is displayed when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the special FIG. 1 starting opening 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 is a big hit. 2 Refer to the special figure determination table for the obtained random number for special figure determination for hitting, which of the special symbol A to special figure F stop display modes is to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214. And decide.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a small hit, special figure 1 display device 212 or special figure 2 Refer to the special figure determination table for the obtained random number for hit special figure determination on the display device 214 as to which of the special symbol G and the special symbol H to be stopped and displayed. To decide.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, if the result of the winning/disapproval determination based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device. It is determined which of the special symbol I and the special symbol J is to be stopped and displayed in 214 by referring to the special symbol determination table for the acquired random symbol determination random value. In addition, the random number value for determining the off symbol is acquired from the random number counter for determining the off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stop symbol of the off symbol.

FIG. 38 shows an example of a special figure variation display time determination table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display in the special figure variation game.

FIG. 38(a) shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol variable display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231) of the main controller timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 38A is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 38(a), the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes "stop symbol", "table", "random number selection range", "variable time" and "decorative symbol display device" from the left column. It is composed of five items of "performance mode".

"Stop symbol" in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special symbol determination table of FIG. 37(c), and includes "special symbol A/special symbol B" and "special symbol C to special symbol H". , And two types of “special map I/special map J”. The “table” is divided into four “1” to “4” corresponding to the four “stop symbols”. The table "1" corresponds to "special drawing A/special drawing B" of "stop design", and the table "2" corresponds to "special drawing C to special drawing H". The "table" selected when the "stop symbol" is "special map A/special map B" is whether or not the gaming state at the time of determining the variable time is the electric support state (presence or absence of electric support) and the special figure 1 It is common to the table "1" regardless of the number of held variable games. In addition, the "table" selected when the "stop symbol" is "special drawing C to special drawing H" is a table regardless of whether or not there is electric power support at the time of changing time determination and the number of special game 1 variable games held. It is common for "2".

If the "stop symbol" is "special map I/special map J", table "3" or table "4" will be displayed depending on the presence or absence of electric support at the time of fluctuation determination and the number of pending special game 1 fluctuation games. It is supposed to be selected. If either special map I or special map J is determined as a stop symbol, and there is no electric support and the number of pending special game 1 variable games is three, table "3" is selected and there is no electric support and the relevant hold. If the number is 0 to 2, or if there is electric power support and the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the table "4" is selected.

“Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining special figure timer number. The random number value for determining the special figure timer number is, for example, acquired at the same time as the acquisition of the starting information of the special figure 1 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read from the predetermined storage area when the special display 1 variable display time is determined. It has become. In the table “1”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table "2", the "random number selection range" is not classified by numerical value. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four numbers 0 to 65000, numbers 65001 to 65400, numbers 65401 to 65500, and numbers 65501 to 65535. In the table “4”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four numbers 0 to 50000, numbers 50001 to 60000, numbers 60001 to 65000, and numbers 65001 to 65535.

"Variation time" on the right side of the figure of "random number selection range" indicates the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. “Variation time” is table “1” and the random number selection range is “15000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. Are each assigned. Further, "12000 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in correspondence with the table "2" and the random number selection range of numerical values 0 to 65535. In addition, “variation time” corresponds to the table “3” and the random number selection range corresponds to “3000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 65001 to 65400, and corresponding to the numerical values 65401 to 65500. “40000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 65501 to 65535. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “4” and the random number selection range is “8000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” is corresponding to the numerical values 50001 to 60000, and is corresponding to the numerical values 60001 to 65000. “40000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

"Variation time" on the right-hand side in the figure "Demonstration mode on decorative symbol display device" indicates the special mode 1 variation game production mode corresponding to the combination of "stop symbol" and the selected "fluctuation time" There is. "Demonstration mode on decorative design display device" corresponds to "normal design" and "45000 ms" for "stop pattern", "special drawing A/special drawing B" and variation time "1500 ms". “Per reach A” and “per reach B” corresponding to the variation time “65000 ms”. Further, in the "effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is assigned to "special symbol C to special symbol H" and "all chances off" in correspondence with a variation time of "12000 ms". Further, in the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device", the "stop symbol" is "special figure I/special figure J" and the variation time "3000 ms" corresponds to "shortening" and variation time "8000 ms". Correspondingly "out of reach", fluctuation time "10000 ms" in response to "normal reach failure", fluctuation time "40000 ms" in response to "reach A failure", fluctuation time "60000 ms" in response to "reach B failure" Are assigned respectively.

FIG. 38(b) shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol variable display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229) of the main controller timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 38B is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 38(b), the special figure 2 variable display time determination table is, in the left column, "stop symbol", "table", "random number selection range", "variable time" and "decorative symbol display device". It is composed of five items of "performance mode".

"Stop symbol" in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special symbol determination table of FIG. 37(c), and includes "special symbol A/special symbol B" and "special symbol C to special symbol H". , And three types of “special map I/special map J”. The “table” is divided into five “5” to “9” corresponding to the “stop symbols” divided into five. The "table" number in the special figure 2 variable display time determination table is a serial number from the "table" number in the special figure 1 variable display time determination table. The table "5" corresponds to "special drawing A/special drawing B" of "stop design", and the table "6" corresponds to "special drawing C to special drawing H". The "table" selected when the "stop symbol" is "special map A/special map B" is the table "5" regardless of the presence or absence of electric power support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of pending special game 2 variable games. It is common in. Also, the "table" selected when the "stop symbol" is "special map C to special map H" is a table regardless of whether or not there is an electric power support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of pending special game 2 variable games. It is common for "6".

If the "stop symbol" is "special map I/special map J", any of tables "7" to "9" depending on the presence or absence of electric support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of pending special game 2 variable games Is selected. If either special map I or special map J is determined as the stop symbol, and there is electric support and the number of pending special game 2 fluctuation games is 1 to 3, table "7" is selected and electric support is provided. When the number of reservations is 0, the table "8" is selected, and when the number of reservations is 0 and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table "9" is selected.

“Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining special figure timer number. The random number for determining the special figure timer number is acquired, for example, at the same time as the acquisition of the start information of the special figure 2 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read from the predetermined storage area when the special display 2 variable display time is determined. Has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the tables "6" to "8", the "random number selection range" is not divided by numerical values. In the table "9", the "random number selection range" is divided into four numbers 0 to 50000, numbers 50001 to 60000, numbers 60001 to 65000, and numbers 65001 to 65535.

The "variation time" on the right side of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game. “Variation time” is “5” in the table “5” and the random number selection range corresponds to numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 20001 to 65535. Are each assigned. Further, "12000 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in correspondence with the table "6" and the random number selection range of numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, "1500 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in correspondence with the table "7" and the random number selection range of numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, "8000 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in correspondence with the table "8" and the random number selection range of numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “9” and the random number selection range is “8000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 50001 to 60000, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000. “40000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

"Variation time" on the right-hand side in the figure "Demonstration mode on decorative symbol display device" indicates the special mode 2 variation game production mode corresponding to the combination of "stop symbol" and the selected "fluctuation time" There is. In the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is "special symbol A/special symbol B", and a variation time of 15000 ms corresponds to "normal reach", and a variation time of 45000 ms corresponds to "reach A". "Hit" and "Reach B hit" are assigned corresponding to the variation time of 65000 ms. Further, in the "effect mode on the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is assigned to "special symbol C to special symbol H" and "all chances off" corresponding to a variation time of 12000 ms. Further, in the "drafting mode on the decorative symbol display device", the "stop symbol" is "special symbol I/special symbol J" and the variation time of 1500 ms corresponds to "ultra-shortening deviation" and the variation time of 8000 ms. “Out”, “normal reach out” corresponding to a variation time of 10,000 ms, “reach A out” corresponding to a variation time of 40,000 ms, and “reach B out” corresponding to a variation time of 60,000 ms are assigned.

FIG. 39 shows an example of the pending change announcement lottery table 1 used in the pending change lottery processing (step 11205 of FIG. 43) in the start winning award sub-side prefetching announcement execution processing (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 43). ing.

The pending change notice lottery table 1 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example. The pending change notice lottery table 1 is used to determine whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The pre-reading notice means a notice of the decision result of the pending special figure variation game. The pending change notice lottery table 1 is commonly used for the special maps 1 and 2. Here, as an example, the icons to be displayed in the special figure 1 reserved icon display area and the special figure 2 reserved icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are determined.

FIG. 40 shows an example of icon images displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area and the special figure 2 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 40(a) shows an image representing a "circle", which is a hold icon displayed at the time of pre-notification of "no change", and FIG. 40(b) is displayed at the time of pre-notification of "hold A". FIG. 40C shows a character image representing "Holding", which is a holding icon, and FIG. 40C illustrates a character image representing "Yoshimune", which is a holding icon displayed at the time of advance notice of "Holding B". ..

The pending change notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 39 includes “variable time”, “effect mode on decorative pattern display device”, “no change”, “holding A”, “holding B” and “movable body” from the left column. It is divided into six. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. 38, and is a command in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the transmission setting process (step 10233), the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as the special figure timer number is shown. “Variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

"Variation time" on the right-hand side in the figure, "Demonstration mode in decorative symbol display device", shows a special mode fluctuation game production mode. "Demonstration mode on decorative pattern display device" is associated with "variation time" and "effect mode on decorative pattern display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same. "10000ms" is "normal reach loss", "40000ms" is "reach A loss", "60000ms" is "reach B loss", "15000ms" is "normal reach loss", and "45000ms" is "reach A loss". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

"No change" on the right side in the figure of "drafty mode on the decorative symbol display device" indicates that the "normally held" icon in FIG. 40(a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the right side thereof. "Hold A" indicates that the "Hold A" icon in FIG. 40(b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "Hold B" to the right of it is "Hold B" in FIG. 40(c). The icon is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the “movable body” on the right side thereof indicates that the shielding device 246 is operated, for example. “No change”, “Hold A”, “Hold B”, and “Movable body” are numerical value ranges of random numbers to be compared with the random number value for pending change announcement lottery obtained from the random number for pending change announcement lottery provided in the RAM 408. Each is divided into (0 to 99), and is divided into 6 corresponding to the "variation time".

When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the random number value for pending change announcement lottery is 0 to 89 for "no change" and 90 to 99 for "holding A". Is assigned, and no numerical value is assigned to “holding B” and “movable body”. Note that, in FIG. 39, the fact that a numerical value is not assigned is represented by "-". When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 39 is assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 40 to 69 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical value 80 to “holding B” as the numerical range. .About.95 are assigned, and the numerical values 96 to 99 are assigned to the "movable body". When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 29 is assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 30 to 79 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical value 80 is set to “holding B” as the numerical range. .About.89 are assigned, and the numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to the "movable body". When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 69 is assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 70 to 95 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical value 96 to “holding B” as the numerical range. .About.97 are assigned, and numerical values 98 to 99 are assigned to the "movable body". When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 29 is assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 30 to 69 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical value 70 to “holding B” as the numerical range. .About.85 are assigned, and numerical values 86 to 99 are assigned to the "movable body". When the “variation time” is “65000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 19 is assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 20 to 49 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical value 50 to “holding B” as the numerical range. .About.79 are assigned, and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to the "movable body".

FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the start winning award sub-side prefetching notice execution process executed at the timing of winning the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232. The start side winning pre-reading advance notice execution process is executed, for example, in the effect control process (step 10309 in FIG. 35) of the first sub-control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step 11201, the state of the prefetch execution flag is determined. If the prefetch execution flag is not off (step 11201: No), the process proceeds to step 11213. If the pre-reading flag is off (step 11201: Yes), the variation time selected in step 11109 or 11123 of the special drawing pre-reading process this time is in the “variation time” of the pending change notice lottery table 1 in FIG. 39. It is determined whether or not (step 11203).

In step 11203, if the current variation time is not in the “variation time” of the pending change notice lottery table 1 of FIG. 39 (step 11203: No), the process proceeds to step 11213. If the current variation time is in the "variation time" of the pending change notice lottery table 1 of FIG. 39 (step 11203: Yes), the pending change lottery process using the pending change notice lottery table 1 of FIG. 39 described above. Is executed (step 11205).

When the result of the lottery process in step 11205 is not winning (in the case of “no change” in FIG. 39) (step 11207: No), the process proceeds to step 11213. If the result of the lottery process in step 11205 is a win (in a case other than “no change” in FIG. 39) (step 11207: Yes), the number of prefetching notice executions is set (step 11209) and the prefetching execution flag is turned on. (Step 11211). Next, in step 11213, a hold command is output and the processing ends.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variation start time sub-side prefetching notice execution process executed at the timing when the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game is started. The sub-side prefetching announcement execution process at the start of fluctuation is executed, for example, within the effect control process (step 10309 in FIG. 35) of the first sub-control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step 11301, the state of the prefetch execution flag is determined. If the prefetch execution flag is not on (step 11301: No), the process proceeds to step 11308. If the prefetch execution flag is on (step 11301: Yes), the prefetch advance notice execution count is decremented by 1 (step 11303), and it is determined whether or not the prefetch advance notice execution count obtained by subtracting 1 is 0 (step 11305). ..

In step 11305, if the prefetching notice execution count is not 0 (step 11305: No), the process advances to step 11308. If the prefetching notice execution count is 0 (step 11305: Yes), the prefetching executing flag is turned off (step 11307).

In step 11308, the normal notice lottery process is executed, then in step 11309, the normal notice command is output, and the process ends.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a twelfth embodiment of the configuration of the transmissive portion according to the present invention, which is a diagram of an example of a specific configuration of the transmissive portion 700, in which (a) is a front view and (b) is 8A is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern is made to emit light in the transmissive region of the transmissive portion 700 shown in FIG. 9A, and FIG. 8C is a diagram showing how light is emitted to the transmissive region shown in FIG. is there.

The transmissive portion 700 irradiates light from the side surface of the transmissive member 703 and the transmissive member 703 that functions as a direction changing unit by performing lens cutting, for example, at positions corresponding to the smile mark patterns of the transmissive regions 703b and 703c. The light emitting means 701, the outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, the inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, the outer glass 705, the transparent member 703, and the inner glass 706. And a glass unit frame 704 to be fitted therein.

The light emitting means 701 includes light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H, which are LEDs, for example, and a connector 708 for supplying power to the light sources 702A to 702H is provided on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704. Exposed. When the light sources 702A to 702H are caused to emit light, the light is directionally changed to the player side by the lens cut provided in the transmissive regions 703b and 703c of the transmissive member 703, and the smile mark pattern is emitted.

46 and 47 are diagrams for explaining that in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, the light sources at different positions are caused to emit light so that the patterns to be made different are different.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the smile mark pattern (eg, eyes and mouth) 703ba in the transmissive region 703b is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702A and 702E to emit light. When the light sources 702A and 702E are caused to emit light, other patterns may also emit light, or only the pattern 703ba may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), the smile mark pattern (for example, the outline of the face) 703bb in the transmissive region 703b is made to emit light by making the light sources 702B and 702F emit light. When the light sources 702B and 702F are made to emit light, other patterns may also be made to emit light, or only the pattern 703bb may be made to emit light.

In this way, of the smile mark patterns in the transmissive area 703b, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is changed, and the light source that emits light is controlled, whereby one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light selectively.

The smile mark patterns 703ba and 703bb in the transmissive region 703b are made to emit light by making the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F emit light. When the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E and 702F are made to emit light, other patterns may be made to emit light, or only the patterns 703ba and 703bb may be made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 47A, in order to make the smile mark pattern 703ca (for example, the outline of the face) 703ca in the transparent region 703c emit light, it is realized by making the light sources 702C and 702G emit light. When the light sources 702C and 702G are made to emit light, other patterns may also be made to emit light, or only the pattern 703ca may be made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703cb in the transmissive region 703c is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702D and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702D and 702H are caused to emit light, other patterns may also emit light, or only the pattern 703cb may emit light.

In this way, of the smile mark patterns in the transmissive region 703c, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is changed, and the light source that emits light is controlled, whereby one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light selectively.

The smile mark patterns 703ca and 703cb in the transmissive region 703c are made to emit light by making the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G, and 702H emit light. When the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G and 702H are made to emit light, other patterns may be made to emit light, or only the patterns 703ca and 703cb may be made to emit light.

FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the orientation of the light source and the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, (a) showing the orientation of the light source, and (b) in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the place enclosed with the square A.

Light sources 702A to 702H are arranged around the side of the transparent member 703 so as to emit light toward the center of the transparent member 703. In each region of the transmissive member 703, the intensity of light received from the light source varies depending on the distance from the light source and the direction of the light source. Here, the relationship between the regions and the light sources will be described for each of the regions B, C, D, and E in FIG. 48B so that uniform light emission effects can be achieved in each region. The light output from each of the light sources 702A to 702H has directivity, the light that goes straight to the center in the direction facing the light source is the strongest, and the light that is weaker than the center goes diagonally.

The region B receives irradiation of light from two upper and lower light sources (for example, light sources 702A and 702E). In this region B, both the upper and lower light sources face each other, and strong light goes straight due to the directivity of the light sources, but the light is attenuated because the distance from the upper and lower two light sources is long. Therefore, in this region B, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for presentation by receiving light from the upper and lower light sources.

The area C receives light from one lower light source (for example, the light source 702E). In this area C, the direction of one lower light source is directly opposed, and strong light travels straight due to the directivity of the light source, and the distance from this one lower light source is short. Therefore, in this region C, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for the presentation by receiving the light from the lower one light source.

The region D is located at a short distance from one light source (for example, the light source 702E), but is located in an oblique direction with respect to this one light source, and receives less light than in the case of facing directly. Therefore, in this region D, it is possible to receive the light from another light source (for example, the light source 702E) in the vicinity and to secure the light amount necessary for the effect.

The area E is close to the light source (for example, the light sources 702D and 702E), but is located in a large diagonal direction with respect to the light source, and light is hard to reach.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, (a) shows the pattern and the direction of the light source, and (b) shows the broken line in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by the ellipse F.

A lens cut is applied to the transmissive region 703d of the transmissive member 703 so that a smile mark pattern can be emitted. With reference to the enlarged view of FIG. 49(b), lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de are provided in a portion surrounded by an ellipse F. Each of the lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de has a different cut angle according to the direction of the light emitted from the light source. For example, the lens cut 703dc has a cut facing the light source 702F, and the lens cut 703de has a cut facing the light source 702E.

As described above, the pattern lens cut is performed on the transmissive portion, and the light emission display of the pattern is performed by directing the light from the light source to the player side. In some cases, it is referred to as a "light emitting display of the applied pattern".

50 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game board 200 different from that of FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view showing the half mirror role objects 710a and 710b and the blade role objects 711a and 711b removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 50 has the same basic configuration as the example shown in FIG. 30, so detailed description thereof will be omitted, and only different points will be described.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. This effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 at substantially the center. In the rendering device 206, half mirror accessory parts 710a and 710b are arranged on both sides on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. A blade accessory 711a is arranged behind the half mirror accessory 710a, and a movable blade accessory 711b is arranged behind the half mirror accessory 710b.

The blade accessories 711a and 711b are moved in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

52: is a figure which shows the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 51, (a) is a front perspective view, (b) is a rear perspective view. Since the half mirror role product 710a has the same configuration as the half mirror role product 710b, the configuration of the half mirror role product 710b will be described here as a representative.

FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 54(a) is a front view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 54(a).

The half mirror accessory 710b is configured by stacking plate-shaped transparent members 713, 714, and 715 and a plate-shaped half mirror member 716 and attaching them to the base member 712. The LED substrates 717 are provided on the sides of the plate-shaped transparent members 713, 714, and 715, and light can be emitted from the sides of the plate-shaped transparent members 713, 714, and 715.

55 is a view for explaining the structure of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, (a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 54(a), and (b) is a blade accessory 711b. It is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of the half mirror role object 710b with arrangement|positioning.

The LED 717 a mounted on the LED board 717 is arranged on the side of the transparent member 713. The transparent member 713 is provided with a lens cut 713a for emitting a pattern, and the lens cut 713a reflects the light emitted from the LED 717a to the front side (player side).

The LEDs 717b mounted on the LED board 717 are arranged laterally of the transparent member 714. The transparent member 714 is provided with a lens cut 714a for emitting a pattern, and the lens cut 714a reflects the light emitted from the LED 717b to the front side (player side).

The LED 717c mounted on the LED substrate 717 is arranged on the side of the transparent member 715. The transparent member 715 is provided with a lens cut 715a that emits a pattern, and the lens cut 715a reflects the light emitted from the LED 717c to the front side (player side).

The half mirror member 716 is arranged behind the transparent members 713, 714 and 715, and when all the LEDs 717a, 717b and LED717c are not emitting light, the half mirror member 716 becomes transparent as seen from the player side. The rear side of the half mirror member 716 becomes visible from the player side, and when at least one of the LEDs 717a, 717b, and LED717c is emitting light, the half mirror member 716 is in a mirror state when viewed from the player side. The area behind the half mirror member 716 becomes invisible to the player. That is, when all of the LEDs 717a, 717b and 717c are not emitting light, the player can visually recognize the blade role object 711b behind the half mirror member 716, and at least one of the LEDs 717a, 717b and 717c emits light. When it is, the player cannot visually recognize the blade accessory 711b behind the half mirror member 716.

The LED board 717 is equipped with LEDs 717a, LEDs 717b, and 717c corresponding to the transparent members 713, 714, and 715, respectively, and which pattern among the transparent members 713, 714, and 715 is selected by controlling the LEDs to be emitted. You can choose whether or not to emit light, and perform various effects.

56 is a front view for explaining the configuration of the half mirror accessory 710b and the blade accessory 711b shown in FIG. 50, and FIG. 56(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the LEDs 717a, 717b, and 717c are made to emit light, (B), (c) and (d) is a figure which shows a mode that the blade accessory 711b is driven in the state which does not make LED717a, LED717b, and LED717c light-emit. Since the half mirror role product 710a and the blade role product 711a have the same configurations as the half mirror role product 710b and the blade role product 711b, the configurations of the half mirror role product 710b and the blade role product 711b will be described here as representatives. ..

As shown in FIG. 56(a), when the LEDs 717a, 717b, and 717c are made to emit light, patterns are emitted by the lens cuts 713a, 714a, and 715a of the transparent members 713, 714, and 715, and the half mirror member 716 becomes It becomes a mirror state, and the blade role object 711b behind the half mirror role object 710b is invisible to the player.

In the state shown in FIG. 56(b), the LED 717a, the LED 717b, and the LED 717c are not emitting light, so that the half mirror member 716 becomes transparent, and the blade role 711b behind the half mirror role 710b is visible from the player side. It will be possible.

In the state shown in FIG. 56(c), the blade role object 711b behind the half mirror role object 710b is driven while the LEDs 717a, 717b, and 717c are not emitting light. The blade accessory 711b is rotatable around a drive shaft 718 and is driven by a motor (not shown). At this time, the LED 717a, the LED 717b, and the LED 717c may be caused to emit light to perform the light emission effect of the patterns of the transparent members 713, 714, and 715.

In the state shown in FIG. 56(d), the blade role object 711b behind the half mirror role object 710b is driven while the LEDs 717a, 717b and 717c are not emitting light. The blade accessory 711b can be further rotated around the drive shaft 719 of the blade 711ba from the state of FIG. 56(c), and is driven by a motor (not shown). At this time, the LED 717a, the LED 717b, and the LED 717c may be caused to emit light to perform the light emission effect of the patterns of the transparent members 713, 714, and 715.

FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG.

The shielding device 246 includes left doors 246a and 246b and right doors 246c and 246d, and is arranged on the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving mechanism 246e that can move the left door 246a and the right door 246c in the left-right direction is provided above the left door 246a and the right door 246c.

Each of the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d has a transparent portion as described later in detail.

FIG. 58 is a front view showing an example of a shielding device 246 different from that of FIG. 57, and FIGS. 58(a), (b) and (c) are diagrams showing how the door of the shielding device 246 moves.

The shielding device 246 is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 and has a left door 246f and a right door 246g. The left door 246f and the right door 246g can be moved in the left-right direction by a moving mechanism such as a motor (not shown).

The left door 246f has a transparent portion 246fa, and a pattern 246faa is formed on the transparent portion 246fa by lens cutting. The left door 246f has LEDs 720a, 720b and 720c on the left side, and the pattern 246faa emits light by making the LEDs 720a, 720b and 720c emit light.

The right door 246g has a transparent portion 246ga, and a pattern 246gaa is formed on the transparent portion 246ga by lens cutting. The right door 246g has LEDs 721a, 721b, and 721c on the right side, and the pattern 246gaa emits light by causing the LEDs 721a, 721b, and 721c to emit light.

In this embodiment, the left door 246f and the right door 246g are provided with the LED as the light source. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 58B and 58C, the left door 246f and the right door 246g that are movable bodies are used. Even when is moved in the left-right direction, the positional relationship between the light source and the transmissive portion does not change, and stable and reliable light emission effect can be performed.

FIG. 59 is a schematic view showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a plan view, (b) is a front view of a state where left and right LEDs are lit, and (c). Is a front view of a state where the upper and lower LEDs are emitted, and (d) is a front view of a state where the left and right LEDs are emitted.

The left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are arranged inside the frame portion 246A. In this embodiment, the left door 246a is fixed to the left end and the right door 246c is fixed to the right end. Although the left door 246b and the right door 246d are movable in the left-right direction, all the doors may be movable in the left-right direction, or only any door may be movable.

The LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d, which are the light sources, are provided in the frame portion 246A, and the LEDs 722a, 722b and 722c are the frame portion 246A. LEDs 723a, 723b and 723c are provided on the right side of the frame 246A, LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c and 724d are provided on the upper side of the frame 246A, and LEDs 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d are provided on the left side of the frame 246A. It is provided on the lower side of the portion 246A.

The left door 246b has a transparent portion 246ba, and patterns 246baa and 246bab are formed on the transparent portion 246ba by lens cutting. The right door 246d has a transmissive portion 246da, and patterns 246daa and 246dab are formed on the transmissive portion 246da by lens cutting.

The pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d are formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the left and right directions, and by making the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b and 723c emit light. , Light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59(b)).

The pattern 246bab on the left door 246b and the pattern 246dab on the right door 246d are formed by lens cuts that reflect light from the up and down direction and emit light, and LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d are formed. By emitting light, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59(c)).

When only the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b and 723c are made to emit light, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b and the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d do not emit light (see FIG. 59(b)), LEDs 724a, 724b, When only 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d are made to emit light, the pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d do not emit light (see FIG. 59(c)).

When all the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d are made to emit light, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b, the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d, and the left door 246d. All of the pattern 246baa of 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d emit light, and a crest of three-leaf aoi appears in a circle (see FIG. 59(d)).

FIG. 60 is a schematic view showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a front view showing a pattern formed by lens cutting on each door, and (b) is a plan view. , (C) is a front view showing an arrangement of LEDs as light sources provided in the frame portion, (d) is a front view showing a state in which upper and lower LEDs provided at ends are emitting light, and (e) is left and right. FIG. 4 is a front view of a state in which the LED of FIG.

The left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are arranged inside the frame portion 246A. In this embodiment, the left door 246a is fixed to the left end and the right door 246c is fixed to the right end. Although the left door 246b and the right door 246d are movable in the left-right direction, all the doors may be movable in the left-right direction, or only any door may be movable.

LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, 725d, 726a, 726b, 726c, 726d, 727a, 727b, 727c, 727b, 728a. , 728c, 728d, 729a, 729b, 729c and 729d are provided on the frame portion 246A, the LEDs 722a, 722b and 722c are provided on the left side portion of the frame portion 246A, and the LEDs 723a, 723b and 723c are on the right side of the frame portion 246A. LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c, and 724d are provided near the center of the upper portion of the frame portion 246A, and LEDs 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d are provided near the center of the lower portion of the frame portion 246A. 726b is provided in the upper part of the left door 246a near the left side of the upper part of the frame part 246A, LEDs 726c and 726d are provided in the upper part of the left door 246b near the left side of the upper part of the frame part 246A, and LEDs 727a and 727b are the frame part. The LED 727c and 727d are provided near the right side of the upper portion of the 246A above the right door 246c, the LEDs 727c and 727d are provided near the right side of the upper portion of the frame portion 246A above the right door 246d, and the LEDs 728a and 728b are below the frame portion 246A. Is provided under the left door 246a near the left side of the part, LEDs 728c and 728d are provided under the left door 246b near the left side of the lower side of the frame 246A, and LEDs 729a and 729b are under the lower side of the frame 246A. It is provided below the right door 246c near the right side, and the LEDs 729c and 729d are provided below the right door 246d near the right side of the lower side portion of the frame portion 246A.

The left door 246a has a transparent portion 246aa, and a pattern 246aaa is formed on the transparent portion 246aa by lens cutting. The right door 246c has a transparent portion 246ca, and a pattern 246caa is formed on the transparent portion 246ca by lens cutting.

The pattern 246aaa of the left door 246a is formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the up and down direction, and makes the LEDs 726a, 726b, 728a, and 728b emit light to produce a light emission effect (FIG. 60(d)). reference). The pattern 246caa of the right door 246c is formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the up and down direction, and makes the LEDs 727a, 727b, 729a, and 729b emit light to produce a light emission effect (FIG. 60(d)). reference).

The left door 246b has a transparent portion 246ba, and patterns 246baa, 246bab and 246bac are formed on the transparent portion 246ba by lens cutting. The right door 246d has a transmissive portion 246da, and patterns 246daa, 246dab, and 246dac are formed on the transmissive portion 246da by lens cutting.

The pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d are formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the left and right directions, and by making the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b and 723c emit light. , Light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59(b)).

The patterns 246bab and bac of the left door 246b and the patterns 246dab and 246dac of the right door 246d are formed by lens cuts that reflect light from above and below and emit light, and LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, By making 725c, 725d, 726c, 726d, 727c, 727d, 728c, 728d, 729c and 729d emit light, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59(c) and FIG. 60(d)).

As shown in FIG. 60(d), the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved inward so that the pattern 246bac of the left door 246b is below the LEDs 726c and 726d and the pattern 246dac of the right door 246d is below the LEDs 727c and 727d. In this state, the transmissive portions 246aa and 246ba are generated by causing the LEDs 726a, 726b, 726c, 726d, 727a, 727b, 727c, 727d, 728a, 728b, 728c, 728d, 729a, 729b, 729c and 729d to emit light. The light emission effect of the patterns 246aaa and 246bac can be performed in the overlapping portion, and the light emission effect of the patterns 246caa and 246dac can be performed in the overlapping portion of the transmissive portions 246ca and 246ca. Further, at this time, the patterns 246bab and 246dab may be weakly emitted by receiving weak light from the upper and lower oblique directions, or may not be emitted.

As shown in FIG. 60(d), the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved inward and abutted against each other, and the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d. When the light is emitted, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b, the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d, the pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d illuminate, and the crest of the three-leaf hollyhock appears in the circle (Fig. 60 ( See e)).

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration in which a plurality of transmissive parts are stacked to produce a light emission effect, and (a) is a front view of a state in which the transmissive parts are laid flat without overlapping, FIG. 7A is a perspective view showing a state in which a plurality of transmissive portions are stacked, FIG. 13C is a perspective view showing a plurality of transmissive portions stacked and widening an interval, and FIG. It is a perspective view showing a pattern.

In this embodiment, flat plate-shaped transmissive portions 246ha, 256ia and 246ja are provided, and the transmissive portion 246ha is provided with a lens cut pattern 246haa for displaying the head and bale of a character (Yoshimune) by light emission, and the transmissive portion 246ia is a character. The upper half of the body is provided with a lens-cut pattern 246iaa, and the transmissive portion 246ja is provided with a lens-cut pattern 246jaa of which the lower body of the character is luminescently displayed.

By stacking the transmissive portions 246ha, 256ia, and 246ja to produce a light emission effect, for example, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional light emission effect in which the upper part of the character is in the front and the lower part is in the back.

FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 showing an embodiment in which a plurality of transparent parts are overlapped to produce a light emission effect.

The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The transmissive member 703 of the transmissive portion 700 is provided with a pattern 703e formed by lens cutting for illuminating and displaying the face of the character (Yoshimune). Further, the transmission part 246ka of the shielding device 246 is provided with a lens-cut pattern 246kaa that emits and displays a family crest (circle clover leaf), and the transmission part 246la is a lens-cut pattern that emits and displays a family crest (circle clover leaf). 246 laa is applied.

In the game board 200, the transmissive member 703 of the transmissive part 700 is disposed so as to overlap the front surface of the transmissive part 246ka and the transmissive part 246la of the shielding device 246.

Arranging a plurality of transmissive portions in an overlapping manner means that one device has a plurality of transmissive portions such as the half mirror role object 710a or 710b, and the plurality of transmissive portions are disposed in an overlapping manner. In some cases, a plurality of transmissive portions provided in each of a plurality of different devices such as the transmissive portion 700 and the shielding device 246 may be arranged in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200 showing an embodiment in which a plurality of transmissive parts are overlapped to produce a light emission effect.

The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The transparent member 703 is provided with a lens-cut pattern 703f for emitting a heart mark by light emission. In this embodiment, when the blade 711ba of the blade accessory 711b, which is a movable body, moves, the blade 711ba overlaps the pattern 703f.

It should be noted that the configurations relating to all of the above-described light emission effects can be appropriately applied to the specific examples of the effects described below.

64(a) to 64(g) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

65(a) to (c) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 64(a) to (g), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area 208c. In the upper right part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of special figure 1 variable games that are being held is displayed and the number of special figure 1 pending games is displayed, and the number of special figure 2 variable games that are being held is displayed. A reserved number notification area 730b for special figure 2 is provided. At the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol region 731a and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol region 731b are provided. A frame portion 733 is displayed in the center of the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special icon 1 reserved icon display area for displaying icons corresponding to the number of special game variable games that are held on the left side of the frame portion 733. 732a is provided, and on the right side of the frame portion 733, a special figure 2 reserved icon display area 732b for displaying icons corresponding to the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is provided.

In the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1, the result of the previous special figure 1 variation game is displayed in the alphabet corresponding to special figure A to special figure J shown in FIG. 32(a). Further, in the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2, the result of the previous special figure 2 variation game is displayed in the alphabet corresponding to special figure A to special figure J shown in FIG. 32(a).

In FIG. 64(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is the special figure J (second off symbol). ), and shows the case where the number of reserved special game 1 variable games is three.

64(a), in FIG. 64(b), the suspended special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased, and the other icons are sequentially shifted toward the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is subtracted by 1 and 2 is displayed.

64(b), in FIG. 64(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol display area 208a, the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special drawing 1 as a result that it is a special drawing J.

64(c), in FIG. 64(d), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased, and the other icons are sequentially shifted toward the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 64(e) following FIG. 64(d), a character (panda) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a reach notice.

64(e), in FIG. 64(f), decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and reach is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b! And the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In FIG. 64(g), which follows FIG. 64(f), a pattern 703e provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the pattern 703e. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b do not overlap with the pattern 703e. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 do not overlap with the pattern 703e. The frame portion 733, the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a and the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 732b overlap the pattern 703e. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a, the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b, the special figure 1 reserved icon display area 732a, and the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 732b are areas for displaying the same type of information. Is. Of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the area overlapping the pattern 703e may be more noticeable than the overlapping area and may be less noticeable than the overlapping area.

After FIG. 64(g), in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b), effects are performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a partial area (for example, the upper part) of the decorative pattern display device 208.

65(b), in FIG. 65(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special maps 1 as a special character J.

66(a) to 66(e) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 66(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is the special figure J (second off symbol). ), and shows the case where the number of reserved special game 1 variable games is three.

66(a), in FIG. 66(b), the suspended special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased, and the other icons are sequentially shifted toward the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is subtracted by 1 and 2 is displayed.

66(b), in FIG. 66(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b! And the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

66(c), in FIG. 66(d), the left door 246b and the right door 246d of the shielding device 246 are moved in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and applied to the transparent portion 246ba and the transparent portion 246da. The patterns 246baa and 246daa are luminescently displayed. The left door 246b has an opaque frame portion 246bb, and the right door 246d has an opaque frame portion 246db.

At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the patterns 246baa and 246daa. For this reason, some decorative patterns may be difficult to visually recognize. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b do not overlap with the pattern 703e, but overlap with the opaque frame portion 246db. Therefore, the special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b may be partially invisible. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 do not overlap with the pattern 703e, but overlap with the opaque frame portion 246db. Therefore, the fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol region 731b for special diagram 2 may be partially invisible. Due to the existence of the partially invisible area and the partially invisible area, the player may be able to relatively focus on the decorative pattern displayed in the partially invisible area.

66(d), in FIG. 66(e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special maps 1 as a special character J.

67(a) to 67(h) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 67(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is the special figure J (second off symbol). ), and shows the case where the pending number of the special figure 1 variable game is 2.

67(a), in FIG. 67(b), the suspended special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased, and the other icons are sequentially shifted toward the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 1 is displayed.

67(b), in FIG. 67(c), there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 variable game is shown to have been increased by one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon for the hold added this time is additionally displayed on the outermost side. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is incremented by 1 and 2 is displayed.

67(c), in FIG. 67(d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special maps 1 as a special character J.

67(d), in FIG. 67(e), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased, and the other icons are sequentially shifted toward the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 1 is displayed.

67(e), in FIG. 67(f), a pattern 703g formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703g may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

At this time, the pattern 703g may make the icon displayed in the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a stand out. For example, the pattern 703g may be a light emitting display surrounding the icon. is there.

67(f), in FIG. 67(g), the icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1 changes from a normal circle to a character (panda). The shape of the icon may be changed according to the lottery result of the prefetch lottery process described above.

67(g), in FIG. 67(h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special maps 1 as a special character J.

68(a) to 68(h) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

FIGS. 69(a) to 69(g) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 68(a) to 68(h), a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 68(a), the special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

68(a), in FIG. 68(b), a character (panda) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a reach notice.

68(b), in FIG. 68(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b! And the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In FIG. 66(d), which follows FIG. 68(c), a pattern 703e formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the pattern 703e. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b do not overlap with the pattern 703e. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 do not overlap with the pattern 703e. The frame portion 733, the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a and the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 732b overlap the pattern 703e. Of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the area overlapping the pattern 703e may be more noticeable than the overlapping area and may be less noticeable than the overlapping area. In FIG. 68(d), since the number of pending special game fluctuation games is 0, there is no icon displayed in the pending icon display area 732a for special figure 1 and the pending icon display area 732b for special figure 2, Since the pattern 703e does not overlap, the pattern 703e does not hide the icon.

68(e), 68(f) and 68(g) subsequent to FIG. 68(d), effects are performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a partial area (for example, the upper part) of the decorative pattern display device 208.

68(g), in FIG. 68(h), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the pattern 703h applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). Is lit up. The pattern 703h may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the pattern 703h. Special symbol reserved number for 1 broadcast region 730a and the special symbol 2 for the number of holding notification area 730b do not overlap with the pattern 703 h. Fourth symbol region 731a and the fourth symbol region 731b for special symbol 2 for special symbol 1 overlaps the pattern 703 h. Frame portion 733, held icon display area for special symbol 1 732a and special symbol 2 for holding icon display region 732b is that not overlap with the pattern 703 h.

68(h), in FIG. 69(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is A is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as being a special figure A.

69(a), in FIG. 69(b), a big hit effect is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

69(c), in FIG. 69(c), a big hit effect is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. As an effect at this time, since it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball so as to go to the right side of the game area 124 during the big hit (it is easy to win the variable winning port 234), an effect which suggests a right hit is provided. May be done.

69(c), in FIG. 69(d), a big hit is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. As the effect at this time, there is a case where an effect that suggests what kind of effect should be developed to become advantageous for the player is performed. In FIG. 69(d), there are two balls to the second special figure starting port 232, and the special figure 2 variable game is shown to have been increased by two. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b, two icons for the hold added this time are additionally displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number notification area 730b, the holding number is added by 2 and 2 is displayed.

69(e), in FIG. 69(e), the left door 246b and the right door 246d of the shielding device 246 are moved to the front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the transmissive portions 246aa, 246ba, 246ca and the transmissive portion are moved. The patterns 246aaa, 246bac, 246caa, and 246dac applied to 246da are luminescently displayed.

69(e), in FIG. 69(f), in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved and closed, and the transparent portion 246ba and the pattern 246baa applied to the transparent portion 246da. 246bab, 246daa, and 246dab are luminescently displayed. Further, the pattern 703e provided on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed as appropriate, and nothing may be displayed or any information may not be displayed.

In FIG. 69(g), which follows FIG. 69(f), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are produced in such a manner as to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state. ..

70(a) to 70(h) are diagrams sequentially showing a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

71(a) to 71(h) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 70(a) to 70(h), specific examples of effects by display and light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order. ..

72(a) to 72(h) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 71(a) to 71(h), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

FIG. 70(a) shows a case where the result of the special game 1 variation game this time is the special diagram A, and there are two suspensions of the variation game of the special diagram 2. In addition, it is displayed that the high probability state (special figure high probability state general figure high probability state) is entered.

70(a), in FIG. 70(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the current high probability state (special figure high probability state universal figure high probability state) while displaying the left symbol display area. Decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 70(c), which is continued from FIG. 70(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 is suspended while displaying that it is currently in a high probability state (special figure high probability state universal figure high probability state). Starting the special figure 2 fluctuation game, the decorative design is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732b is displayed closest to the center. Deletes the icon that was displayed, and shifts the other icons in order to the center. In the reservation number notification area 730b for special figure 2, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 1 is displayed.

70(c), FIG. 70(d) shows a state in which there are three winnings to the second special figure starting port 232 and three special figure 2 variable games are held. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b, three icons for the hold added this time are additionally displayed on the outermost side. In the special figure 2 reservation number notification area 730b, the reservation number is incremented by 3 and 4 is displayed. At this time, for the second icon from the left, a character (panda) is displayed according to the lottery result of the prefetch lottery process.

In FIG. 70(e) subsequent to FIG. 70(d), the left symbol display area is displayed while displaying that the decorative symbol display device 208 is currently in a high probability state (special figure high probability state universal figure high probability state). Decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 70(f), which is continued from FIG. 70(e), the decorative symbol display device 208 is suspended while displaying that it is currently in a high probability state (special figure high probability state universal figure high probability state). Starting the special figure 2 fluctuation game, the decorative design is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732b is displayed closest to the center. Deletes the icon that was displayed, and shifts the other icons in order to the center. In the special figure 2 holding number notification area 730b, the holding number is subtracted by 1 and 3 is displayed.

70(f), in FIG. 70(g), a pattern 703i applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703i may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

At this time, the pattern 703i may make the icon displayed in the special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732b stand out. For example, the pattern 703i may be a light emitting display surrounding the icon. is there.

70(g), in FIG. 70(h), the icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 732b for special figure 2 changes from a character (panda) to another character (bancho). The shape of the icon may be changed according to the lottery result of the prefetch lottery process described above.

71(a), in FIG. 71(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special maps 1 as a special character J.

In FIG. 71(b) following FIG. 71(a), the decorative symbol display device 208 was suspended while displaying that it is currently in a high probability state (special figure high probability state universal figure high probability state). Starting the special figure 2 fluctuation game, the decorative design is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732b is displayed closest to the center. Deletes the icon that was displayed, and shifts the other icons in order to the center. In the special figure 2 reservation number notification area 730b, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 2 is displayed. The special figure 2 variable game started here is the variable game displayed with the hold icon of the character (bancho), and the subsequent effects are effects corresponding to the hold icon of this character (bancho). Here, an effect is displayed in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four and displayed.

71(c), in FIG. 71(c), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in each of display regions 208e, 208f, 208g, and 208h obtained by dividing the decorative pattern display device 208 into four.

In FIG. 71(d), which follows FIG. 71(c), reach display is performed in the display area 208e.

71(e), in FIG. 71(e), a pattern 703j formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703j may make the reach display area 208e stand out, and for example, the pattern 703j may make a light emission display surrounding the display area 208e. In FIG. 71(e), the display area 208g is stopped and displayed, but the display area 208g is not a reach display, so that the display area 208e is not luminescently displayed in a pattern that makes it stand out. The same applies to FIG. 71(f).

71(g), the display area 208f is stopped and displayed, but the display area 208f is not the reach display, so that the display area 208f is not displayed in a luminescent display. Not not.

In FIG. 71(h) following FIG. 71(g), reach display is performed in the display area 208h.

72(a), in FIG. 72(a), a pattern 703k applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703k may make the display area 208h in the reach display conspicuous. For example, the pattern 703k may emit light around the display area 208h.

72(b), in FIG. 72(b), the light emission display of the patterns 703j and 703k provided on the transparent member 703 is stopped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side), and the pattern 703l is emitted. indicate. The pattern 703l may be inconspicuous except for the display areas 208e and 208h that are in reach display. For example, the pattern 703l may hide the areas other than the display areas 208e and 208h (for example, the display areas 208f and 208g). It may be a light emitting display.

72(c), in FIG. 72(c), the four-division display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, and the middle symbol display area 208b is variably displayed as a reach display.

72(d), in FIG. 72(d), a pattern 703e provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

72(e), 72(f) and 72(g) subsequent to FIG. 72(d), effects are performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c.

72(g), in FIG. 72(h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is A is displayed in the fourth design area 731b for special drawing 2 as the fact that it is special drawing A.

FIG. 73 shows a case where a liquid crystal display device 208i different from the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided and a general symbol variation effect of a general symbol variation game is performed on this liquid crystal display device 208i, and the symbols and patterns thereof are shown. , (A) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the universal figure that the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays according to the result of the universal figure variation game, and (b) shows the result of the universal figure variation game. The figure shows an example of a universal figure decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 208i, and (c) shows a correspondence between the universal figure of (a) and the universal figure decorative pattern of (b), and a variation of the universal figure. It is a figure which shows the electric Chu opening pattern when each of the lottery results of a game became, and (d) is a figure which shows the pattern of the universal figure fluctuation production which is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 208i.

In the stop display mode of the universal figure of the present embodiment, there are three types of "universal figure A" which is a winning symbol 1, "general symbol B" which is a winning symbol 2 and "general symbol C" which is a deviating symbol. is there. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 repeats the illumination of all seven segments and the illumination of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". When the universal figure variation time has elapsed and the universal figure variation game is notified of winning, the universal figure display device 210 displays "Public figure A" and "Public figure B" in a stopped state, and the universal figure fluctuation game is lost. In the case of notifying, "Public figure display device 210 stops and displays "Public figure C". The normal figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms when the probability is low and 1000 ms when the probability is high. Within this general figure fluctuation time, the general figure fluctuation effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 208i (see FIG. 74). The general figure fluctuation production may be performed at any timing within the general figure fluctuation time. The ordinary figure variation effect may be performed in the frame portion 733 of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that the universal figure variation effect may be at a timing at which the derived result does not conflict with the result of the hit/miss determination of the universal figure or special figure.

As shown in (1) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 1, the effect of displaying "universal figure decoration 1", "universal figure decoration 2", and "universal figure decoration 3" is repeated for 3 seconds.

As shown in (2) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 2, the display of "Public decoration 1", "Public decoration 2", and "Public decoration 3" is repeated for 15 seconds.

As shown in (3) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 3, the effect of displaying "universal figure decoration 2" is repeated for 10 seconds.

As shown in (4) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 4, the display of "Public decoration 1", "Public decoration 2", "Public decoration 3", "Gekiatsu!" is displayed for 10 seconds. Repeat production. “Gekiatsu!” may be a design instead of letters.

As shown in (5) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 5, the effect of repeating the display of "universal figure decoration 2" and "super hot!" is performed for 10 seconds. “Gekiatsu!” may be a design instead of letters.

As shown in (6) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 6, the effect of displaying “latency?”, “probability”, and “big hit” is repeated for 5 seconds. “Hidden?”, “Sudden”, and “Big hit” may be patterns instead of letters.

As shown in (7) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 7, the effect of displaying the "character (Yoshimune) design" for 1 second is performed. This production may be performed suddenly or may be won in the universal figure B.

As shown in (8) of FIG. 73(d), as the pattern 8, an effect of displaying any one of "hidden?", "probability", "super hot!", and "big hit" for 8 seconds is performed. “Hidden?”, “Sudden”, “Gekiatsu!”, and “Big hit” may be patterns instead of letters.

74(a) to 74(f) are diagrams sequentially showing a specific example of the display on the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect of light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the display on the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect of the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion, following FIGS. 74(a) to 74(f).

In FIG. 74(a), a logo is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 208i. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the case where the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is the special figure J, the case where there is one suspension of the variable game of the special figure 1 is shown.

74(a), in FIG. 74(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification region 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 0 is displayed. Further, the general figure fluctuation game is started, and the liquid crystal display device 208i starts the general figure fluctuation effect of the pattern shown in FIG. 73(d). At this time, a pattern 703m formed on the transmissive member 703 in front of the liquid crystal display device 208i (on the side of the player) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703m may be larger or smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208i. Further, in the frame portion 733 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display corresponding to the display of the liquid crystal display device 208i is performed.

74(b), in FIG. 74(c), in the liquid crystal display device 208i, the universal figure variation effect of the pattern shown in FIG. 73(d) is performed.

74(c), in FIG. 74(d), the liquid crystal display device 208i stops and displays the universal figure decorative symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the universal figure variation game. Here, the universal figure decoration 2 of FIG. 73(b) is stopped and displayed.

74(d), in FIG. 74(e), the liquid crystal display device 208i moves downward to reach the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol. The display area 208c is arranged so as to be hidden. At this time, the pattern 703n formed on the transmissive member 703 in front of the liquid crystal display device 208i (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703n may be larger or smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208i. The pattern 703n may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 74(f), which follows FIG. 74(e), the liquid crystal display device 208i moves upward to make the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 visible. The liquid crystal display device 208i displays "During electric chew opening", and the frame portion 733 of the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character (Yoshimune) correspondingly. At this time, the pattern 703o applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703o may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in some cases.

74(f), in FIG. 75, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is a special figure. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as being J.

FIGS. 76A to 76E are diagrams sequentially showing a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 76(a), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation game is the special figure J, and shows the case where there is one suspension of the variation game of the special figure 1.

76(a), in FIG. 76(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification region 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 0 is displayed. At this time, the frame portion 733 functions as a variable icon display area and is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a, and the hold icon that has been consumed in the current special figure 1 change game moves to the frame portion 733. It is displayed as a variation icon (a character (panda) in FIG. 76(b)). The variable icon displayed in the frame portion 733 is used as a notice effect of the current symbol variable display.

In FIG. 76(c) following FIG. 76(b), for example, a character (haniwa) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b to give a notice effect.

76(c), in FIG. 76(d), for example, a character (haniwa) is changed to a character (panda) in the middle symbol display area 208b and displayed to give a notice effect. This notice is also used as the notice effect of the symbol variation display this time. At this time, the pattern 703p formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703p may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The pattern 703p may be displayed so as to hide the frame portion 733.

76(d), in FIG. 76(e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b! And the decorative pattern is variably displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variation game is displayed in the fourth figure area 731a for special figure 1.

77(a) to 77(d) are diagrams sequentially showing a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 77(a), the case where the result of the previous special figure 1 variation game is the special figure J, and there is one suspension of the variation game of special figure 1 is shown.

77(a), in FIG. 77(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and a decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification region 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 0 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a step-up notice. The step-up notice is a notice that the reliability of the big hit increases as the number of steps increases. In FIG. 77(b), a step-up notice 208aa of step 1 is given.

In FIG. 76(c), which follows FIG. 77(b), step 2 advance notice 208ba is given. At this time, the patterns 703q and 703r provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player) are luminescently displayed. The patterns 703q and 703r may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pattern 703q is luminescently displayed so as to hide the step-up notice 208aa of step 1. At this time, in particular, the important part of the identification may be hidden by hiding the step number (1 in FIG. 76(c)) of the step-up notice 208aa. The pattern 703r is displayed so as to surround the step-up notice 208ba of step 2. The step-up notice 208aa of step 1 and the step-up notice 208ba of step 2 are notices of the same system.

77(c), in FIG. 77(d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b! And the decorative pattern is variably displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variation game is displayed in the fourth figure area 731a for special figure 1.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214, and the pattern 703e to be emitted and displayed on the transparent member 703.

In the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the lottery. The display of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 is a display according to the same kind of information as this.

The pattern 703e may hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may not hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

The pattern 703e does not hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

The pattern 703e may hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

The pattern 703e does not hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and may not hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

79(a) to (c) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 79(a), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation game is the special figure J, and shows the case where there are two suspensions of the variation game of the special figure 1. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the first hold is indicated by a normal icon, and the second hold is indicated by a character (panda) icon.

79(a), in FIG. 79(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon displayed closest to the center is erased, and the other icons are sequentially shifted toward the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 reservation number notification area 730a, the reservation number is decremented by 1 and 1 is displayed.

79(b), in FIG. 79(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game Is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special drawing 1 as a special drawing J. At this time, the pattern 703e formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, there are cases in which the light emitting display is frequently performed by the transmissive portion when the fluctuation is stopped.

<Third embodiment>
Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 80. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertically-oriented rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, and a player's A ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collecting container (commonly known as a dollar box) not shown, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for launching the game board 200 into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 82) by the operation of the player, and an operation button operated by the player. 136a, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting a chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in a game store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for instructing the player to return the balance, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

81 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 80 as viewed from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 81, the upper portion of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located below the ball tank 150 and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is arranged, for example, so that at least a part thereof overlaps the first sub-board 160 in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the tank rail 154, which may give noise to the control board, is arranged so as to overlap the first sub-board 160 in order to save the area where the members are arranged. However, in the pachinko machine 100, when the tank rail 154 is provided with noise countermeasures, even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub-board 160 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, the pachinko machine 100 is affected by the noise of the first sub-board 160. May be mitigated. Further, since the tank rail 154 is provided with measures against noise, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thus, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is seen through to visually confirm the flow down state of the game ball on the tank rail 154. You may be able to.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and while temporarily holding the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, drive the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 from the payout passage 121 (see FIG. 80) arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 100 pays out balls to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. A power supply board including a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply and a power supply switch 178 for turning on/off the power supply by an operation of a game shop clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating 182, and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. The CR interface section 186 has a CR unit connection section 186a formed of, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface section 186 is adapted to transmit and receive signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection section 186a.

A volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided at the upper left of the drawing of the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160. The volume adjustment switch 192 is composed of, for example, a rotary switch.

The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side thereof. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when exchanging the game board 200, the game board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. It However, depending on the model, it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. Therefore, when removing the game board 200, the pachinko machine 100 is relay board 196 from the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 100. May be configured so that the connection status of can be grasped.

Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with other configurations (for example, a power cord (not shown)) that need to be connected to the outside.

The pachinko machine 100 has a power connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 when viewed from the back side thereof. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced, but at this time, the main board 156, the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-control unit 500 may also be replaced. The board 156, the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-control unit 500 may be provided on the game board 200.

Further, even when the model of the pachinko machine 100 is changed, the main body 104 may be used as it is without being replaced. At this time, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 also need to be replaced. In some cases, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 may be provided on the main body 104 because they may not exist.

82 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is arranged substantially in the center, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a display device using EL or the like may be used. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

In the lower right of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-precision middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol is provided as the fourth decorative symbol next to the decorative symbols displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This fourth symbol is provided with two symbols, that is, the fourth symbol 219 for the special diagram 1 for the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 221 for the special symbol 2 for the special symbol 2, and the effect display area 208d (for example, Display at the bottom). The 4th pattern displays fluctuation/stop, for example, black indicates stop display, and gray indicates fluctuation display.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the regular figure fluctuation games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. It is set up.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning.

The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning port 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with blades 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blades 232a are closed, so that the figure display device 210 wins the figure variation game. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, one is provided below the center of the game board 200 and one is provided below the right of the game board 200. This variable winning a prize mouth 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 win the special figure variation game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the ball. The rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 allow the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launch the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or the starting prize. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

The parts that can contact the game ball, such as the hitting ball direction changing member 236 and the game nail 238, are the game parts that are placed in the game area and that can be contacted by the game ball that is fired.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 is located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball run by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244, which is a rolling area, the game sphere that has entered the receiving hole 244b is discharged from the discharge hole 244a, which is the discharging portion, and the discharged ball can easily enter the first special figure starting port 230. ing.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a thirteenth embodiment of the configuration of the transmissive part according to the present invention, which is a diagram of an example of a specific configuration of the transmissive part 700, in which (a) is a front view and (b) is 8A is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern is made to emit light in the transmissive region of the transmissive portion 700 shown in FIG.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing how the transmissive region shown in FIG. 83B is irradiated with light.

The transmissive portion 700 irradiates light from the side surface of the transmissive member 703 and the transmissive member 703 that functions as a direction changing unit by performing lens cutting, for example, at positions corresponding to the smile mark patterns of the transmissive regions 703b and 703c. The light emitting means 701, the outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, the inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, the outer glass 705, the transparent member 703, and the inner glass 706. And a glass unit frame 704 to be fitted therein.

The light emitting means 701 includes light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H, which are LEDs, for example, and a connector 708 for supplying power to the light sources 702A to 702H is provided on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704. Exposed. When the light sources 702A to 702H are caused to emit light, the light is directionally changed to the player side by the lens cut provided in the transmissive regions 703b and 703c of the transmissive member 703, and the smile mark pattern is emitted. This light source is an irradiation means capable of irradiating at least light toward the transmission region.

FIG. 85 and FIG. 86 are views for explaining that in the configuration shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the light sources at different positions are caused to emit light so that different patterns are made to emerge.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703ba in the transmissive region 703b is made to emit light by making the light sources 702A and 702E emit light. When the light sources 702A and 702E are caused to emit light, other patterns may also emit light, or only the pattern 703ba may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), the smile mark pattern (for example, the contour of the face) 703bb in the transmissive region 703b is made to emit light by making the light sources 702B and 702F emit light. When the light sources 702B and 702F are made to emit light, other patterns may also be made to emit light, or only the pattern 703bb may be made to emit light.

In this way, of the smile mark patterns in the transmissive area 703b, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is changed, and the light source that emits light is controlled, whereby one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light selectively.

The smile mark patterns 703ba and 703bb in the transmissive region 703b are made to emit light by making the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F emit light. When the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E and 702F are made to emit light, other patterns may be made to emit light, or only the patterns 703ba and 703bb may be made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the smile mark pattern (for example, the contour of the face) 703ca in the transmissive region 703c is made to emit light by making the light sources 702C and 702G emit light. When the light sources 702C and 702G are made to emit light, other patterns may also be made to emit light, or only the pattern 703ca may be made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703cb in the transmissive region 703c is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702D and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702D and 702H are caused to emit light, other patterns may also emit light, or only the pattern 703cb may emit light.

In this way, of the smile mark patterns in the transmissive region 703c, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is changed, and the light source that emits light is controlled, whereby one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light selectively.

The smile mark patterns 703ca and 703cb in the transmissive region 703c are made to emit light by making the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G, and 702H emit light. When the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G and 702H are made to emit light, other patterns may be made to emit light, or only the patterns 703ca and 703cb may be made to emit light.

87 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the orientation of the light source and the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, (a) showing the orientation of the light source, and (b) ( It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by the square A in a).

Light sources 702A to 702H are arranged around the side of the transparent member 703 so as to emit light toward the center of the transparent member 703. In each region of the transmissive member 703, the intensity of light received from the light source varies depending on the distance from the light source and the direction of the light source. Here, the relationship between the areas and the light sources will be described for each of the areas B, C, D, and E in FIG. 87(b) so that uniform light emission effects can be achieved in each area. The light output from each of the light sources 702A to 702H has directivity, the light that goes straight to the center in the direction facing the light source is the strongest, and the light that is weaker than the center goes diagonally.

The region B receives irradiation of light from two upper and lower light sources (for example, light sources 702A and 702E). In this region B, both the upper and lower light sources face each other, and strong light goes straight due to the directivity of the light sources, but the light is attenuated because the distance from the upper and lower two light sources is long. Therefore, in this region B, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for presentation by receiving light from the upper and lower light sources.

The area C receives light from one lower light source (for example, the light source 702E). In this area C, the direction of one lower light source is directly opposed, and strong light travels straight due to the directivity of the light source, and the distance from this one lower light source is short. Therefore, in this region C, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for the presentation by receiving the light from the lower one light source.

The region D is located at a short distance from one light source (for example, the light source 702E), but is located in an oblique direction with respect to this one light source, and receives less light than in the case of facing directly. Therefore, in this region D, it is possible to receive the light from another light source (for example, the light source 702E) in the vicinity and to secure the light amount necessary for the effect.

The area E is close to the light source (for example, the light sources 702D and 702E), but is located in a large diagonal direction with respect to the light source, and light is hard to reach.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a pattern and a direction of a light source in a lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in a transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, and FIG. 88B is a diagram showing FIG. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a dashed ellipse F in FIG.

A lens cut is applied to the transmissive region 703d of the transmissive member 703 so that a smile mark pattern can be emitted. Referring to the enlarged view of FIG. 88(b), lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de are provided in the portion surrounded by the ellipse F. Each of the lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de has a different cut angle according to the direction of the light emitted from the light source. For example, the lens cut 703dc has a cut facing the light source 702F, and the lens cut 703de has a cut facing the light source 702E. Further, the lens cut 703dd has a cut in a direction in which light from the light source 702F and the light source 702E can be received.

As described above, the pattern lens cut is performed on the transmissive portion, and the light emission display of the pattern is performed by directing the light from the light source to the player side. In some cases, it is referred to as a "light emitting display of the applied pattern".

89 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

The transparent member 703 described above is provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern 703t for light emission display of the transparent region provided on the transparent member 703 is a decorative symbol display as seen from the player. It is provided at a position overlapping with the device 208.

The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area 208c. At the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol region 731a and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol region 731b are provided. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a for displaying the number of icons of the pending special symbol 1 variable game is provided, and on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, A special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732b for displaying the same number of icons as the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is provided.

The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is for displaying the fluctuation/stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the figure, for example, black indicates stop display and gray color indicates fluctuation display. In the fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1, the stop display may be colored in a predetermined color, blinking in a predetermined color, a predetermined symbol may be displayed, or a plurality of predetermined symbols may be alternately displayed. The variable display in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be colored in a predetermined color, blink a predetermined color, display a predetermined symbol, or alternately display a plurality of prescribed symbols, and stop. It should be distinguishable from the display.

Further, the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol area 731b is to display the fluctuation / stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, for example, in the figure, black indicates stop display, gray color indicates fluctuation display. In the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2, the stop display may develop a predetermined color, blink a predetermined color, display a predetermined symbol, or alternately display a plurality of predetermined symbols. The variable display in the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 may be colored in a predetermined color, blink a predetermined color, display a predetermined symbol, or alternately display a plurality of prescribed symbols, and stop. It should be distinguishable from the display.

In the example shown in FIG. 89, the special figure 1 reserved icon display area 732a, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 732b, the special figure 1 fourth symbol area 731a, the special figure 2 fourth symbol area 731b, Although the patterns 703t are not overlapped with each other, they may be arranged so as to be overlapped with the patterns for light emission display of the transmissive regions provided in the transmissive member 703 so as to be hidden.

90(a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 90(a) to 90(f), a specific example of the effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 by the display and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 90(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special game 1 variable game holding number is 4 is shown. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

90(a), in FIG. 90(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

In FIG. 90(c) following FIG. 90(b), the variable display is continued.

In FIG. 90(d) following FIG. 90(c), the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 90(e) subsequent to FIG. 90(d), the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is stopped and displayed.

90(e), in FIG. 90(f), the swinging pattern is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, and shake fluctuation is performed.

In FIG. 91(a), which is continued from FIG. 90(f), the decorative symbols are displayed while being shaken in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, and the fluctuation fluctuation is continued.

91(a), in FIG. 91(b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Displays a stop.

92(a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

FIGS. 93(a) and 93(b) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 92(a) to 92(f), a specific example of the effect produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

The time series of FIGS. 92(a) to (f) and FIGS. 93(a) to (b) are the same as those of FIGS. 90(a) to (f) and FIGS. 91(a) to (b). May be

In FIG. 92(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is four. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

92(a), in FIG. 92(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

In FIG. 92(c) following FIG. 92(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display. In FIG. 92(c), the pattern 703s provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703s surrounds one of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (in the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 92(d)). It is luminescently displayed so as to surround the decorative pattern. In addition, you may make it light-emit and display the circumference|surroundings of a some decorative design or effect display with the pattern given to the transparent member 703, and the light emission display of the pattern given to the transparent member 703 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. It may be provided on the front side of at least a part of another light emitting display of a decorative pattern or a pattern applied to another transparent portion.

By the way, in the production, for example, the difference in the pattern of light emission displayed among the patterns applied to the transmissive member 703 may indicate the difference in the reliability of the big hit. For example, the effect of emitting the pattern 703s by light emission can be set to have lower reliability than the effect of emitting the pattern 703t shown in FIG. It should be noted that the effect of the luminescent display of this pattern may be carried out when the change is at least a big hit, and the effect of the luminescent display of this pattern may be carried out only when the change is a loss. In addition, the effect of the light emission display of this pattern may be more likely to occur when the fluctuation is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, or vice versa, or may occur at the same frequency.

In FIG. 92(d) following FIG. 92(c), the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a is stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703s continues.

In FIG. 92(e) subsequent to FIG. 92(d), the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703s continues.

92(e), in FIG. 92(f), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, and shake fluctuation is performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703s continues. In FIG. 92(f), the light emission display of the pattern 703s may be stopped in synchronization with the start of the shake fluctuation.

In FIG. 93(a), which is continued from FIG. 92(f), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. In FIG. 93(a), the light emission display of the pattern 703s is stopped while the swing fluctuation is continued. That is, the light emission display of the pattern 703s disappears before the stop display of the decorative pattern. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern 703s may be stopped before the stop display (including the fluctuation fluctuation) of the decorative symbol, or the light emission display of the pattern 703s may be stopped after the stop of the symbol.

93(a), in FIG. 93(b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at.

In addition, the pattern displayed by light emission may be a pattern in which a plurality of light sources at different positions are caused to emit light so as to be highlighted. The same applies to the examples described below.

FIGS. 94(a) to 94(f) are diagrams sequentially showing a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(f), a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect of emitting the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

The time series of FIGS. 94(a)-(f) and FIGS. 95(a)-(b) are the same as the time series of FIGS. 90(a)-(f) and 91(a)-(b). May be It may also be different.

In FIG. 94(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is four. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

94(a), in FIG. 94(b), the suspended special figure 1 variable game is started, and a decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

In FIG. 94(c) following FIG. 94(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display. In FIG. 94(c), the pattern 703t applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703t hides one of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (in the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 94(d)). The display is illuminated so that the decorative pattern is hidden. In addition, you may make it light-emit and display by the pattern given to the transparent member 703 so that a plurality of decorative symbols and effect display may be hidden, and the light-emission display of the pattern given to the transparent member 703 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be provided on the front side of at least a part of another decorative pattern to be displayed or the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the other transparent portion.

By the way, in the production, for example, the difference in the pattern of light emission displayed among the patterns applied to the transmissive member 703 may indicate the difference in the reliability of the big hit. For example, the effect of emitting and displaying the pattern 703t can be set to have higher reliability than the effect of emitting and displaying the pattern 703s shown in FIG. It should be noted that the effect of the luminescent display of this pattern may be carried out when the change is at least a big hit, and the effect of the luminescent display of this pattern may be carried out only when the change is a loss. In addition, the effect of the light emission display of this pattern may be more likely to occur when the fluctuation is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, or vice versa, or may occur at the same frequency.

In FIG. 94(d), which follows FIG. 94(c), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t continues.

In FIG. 94(e) following FIG. 94(d), the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is stopped and displayed, and the reach display is performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t continues.

94(e), in FIG. 94(f), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, and shake fluctuation is performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t continues. In FIG. 94(f), the light emission display of the pattern 703t may be stopped in accordance with the start of the shake fluctuation.

Following FIG. 94(f), in FIG. 95(a), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, and the fluctuation fluctuation is continued. In FIG. 95(a), the light emission display of the pattern 703s is also continued while the fluctuation fluctuation is continued.

95(a), in FIG. 95(b), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is stopped after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern 703t may be stopped before the stop display of the decorative symbol, and until the stop display of the decorative symbol (the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 is displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t may be stopped before the stop display).

96(a) to 96(f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

97(a) to 97(c) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(f), a specific example of the effect produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 96(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is four. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

Continuing from FIG. 96(a), in FIG. 96(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

96(b), in FIG. 96(c), an effect is performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is a corner region provided in the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. It is displayed at 208j2.

In FIG. 96(d), which follows FIG. 96(c), the effect performed in the central region 208j1 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is advanced. In the effect performed in the central region 208j1, for example, there may be an effect in which the reliability of the big hit is different depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box, and here, when the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variation game. There is.

In FIG. 96(e), which follows FIG. 96(d), a pattern 703u formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703u is luminescently displayed so as to surround the effect (in this case, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variation game. In this embodiment, the light emission of the pattern 703u is performed after the display of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started almost at the same time as the display of the fan is started, or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started before the display of the fan.

Following FIG. 96(e), in FIG. 96(f), the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the stop display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a. .. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped before the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped during the stop display of the decorative pattern (including fluctuation fluctuation), or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped at the same time as the display of the fan disappears, or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped before the display of the fan disappears.

96(f), in FIG. 97(a), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach display is performed.

97(a), in FIG. 97(b), the swinging pattern is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

97(b), in FIG. 97(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at.

98(a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

FIGS. 99(a) to 99(c) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 98(a) to 98(f), a specific example of the effect produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 98(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is four. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

98(a), in FIG. 98(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

98(b), in FIG. 98(c), an effect is performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is a corner region provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. It is displayed at 208j2.

In FIG. 98(d), which follows FIG. 98(c), the effect performed in the central region 208j1 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is advanced. In the effect performed in the central region 208j1, for example, there may be an effect in which the reliability of the big hit is different depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box, and here, when the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variation game. There is.

In FIG. 98(e), which follows FIG. 98(d), a pattern 703u provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player) is luminescently displayed. Further, the pattern 703v formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The pattern 703u is luminescently displayed so as to surround the effect (in this case, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variation game. In this embodiment, the light emission of the pattern 703u is performed after the display of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started almost at the same time as the display of the fan is started, or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started before the display of the fan. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703v is started after the display of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703v may be started before the display of the fan, and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be started at the same time when the display of the fan is started.

Following FIG. 98(e), in FIG. 98(f), the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the stop display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a. .. In this embodiment, even after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. Is continuing. The light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be always displayed, or may be in a state in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated. Further, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be different, or may be the same color.

Following FIG. 98(f), in FIG. 99(a), stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and reach display is performed. Even at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are continued.

99(a), in FIG. 99(b), the swing design is displayed while swinging the decorative design in the left design display region 208a, the middle design display region 208b, and the right design display region 208c. In FIG. 99(b), the case where the variation game is out is shown. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped (always on). Incidentally, it may not be stopped.

The effect display for super reach may be displayed between the state of FIG. 99(a) and the state of FIG. 99(b). In that case, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped before the display of the state of FIG. 99(a) is switched to the display of super reach, and the display is switched to the super reach. The light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped before that, and the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped after the display is switched to the super reach display. May be. During the super reach, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped or may be continued as they are. Further, during the super reach, a light emission display different from that during the variable display of the decorative pattern may be performed in the transparent portion (various colors, patterns, lighting patterns, etc.).

99(b), in FIG. 99(c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at. In FIG. 99(c), the fixed display is displayed when the variation game is out of alignment. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the pattern displayed on the transmissive member is displayed when the variable game is out of focus, but the pattern displayed on the transparent member is also displayed when the variable game is a big hit. You may do it. At least a part or all of the same effect (including the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member) may be performed when the variation game is out of sync and when it is a big hit. In addition, at least a part or all of the different effects (including the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member) may be performed when the variation game is out of order and big hit.

100 to 108 are diagrams showing an example of a game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed by the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are examples of effects that are performed when the lottery is not won by the pre-reading notice execution process (for example, the pre-reading notice execution process performed in FIGS. 43 and 44). 102 to FIG. 108 are examples of effects performed in the case where the lottery is won by the pre-reading notice execution process (for example, the pre-reading notice execution process performed in FIGS. 43 and 44). 100(a) to 100(f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

101(a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 100(a) to 100(f), a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 100(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is 2. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

Continuing from FIG. 100(a), in FIG. 100(b), the suspended special figure 1 variable game is started, and a decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

100(b), in FIG. 100(c), an effect is performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is a corner region provided in the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. It is displayed at 208j2. In addition, in FIG. 100(c), there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, and the special game 1 variation game is held by one more. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon regarding the added hold this time is additionally displayed on the inner side of the innermost hold icon among the already displayed hold icons.

In FIG. 100(d), which follows FIG. 100(c), the effect performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is advanced. In the effect performed in the central region 208j1, for example, there may be an effect in which the reliability of the big hit is different depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box, and here, when the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variation game. There is.

In FIG. 100(e), which follows FIG. 100(d), a pattern 703u formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. Further, the pattern 703v formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The pattern 703u is luminescently displayed so as to surround the effect (in this case, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variation game. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan.

100(e), in FIG. 100(f), the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the stop display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a. .. In this embodiment, even after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. Is continuing.

Continuing from FIG. 100(f), in FIG. 101(a), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c. Even at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are continued.

101(a), in FIG. 101(b), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and shake fluctuation is performed. In FIG. 101(b), the case where the variation game is out is shown. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped.

Continuing from FIG. 101(b), in FIG. 101(c), the swing fluctuation continues in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

101(c), in FIG. 101(d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at. In FIG. 101(d), the fixed display is displayed when the variation game is out.

Here, among the holding icons displayed in the holding icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the holding icon to be consumed in the next special figure 1 variation game is indicated by the icon 732aa, and the next special figure 1 variation The hold icon to be consumed in the game is indicated by the icon 732ab.

101(e), in FIG. 101(e), in starting the next special figure 1 variation game that has been suspended, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Before the decorative design is variably displayed, the moving animation of the hold icon is started on the decorative design display device 208. It should be noted that a movement animation of the hold icon may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern, or a movement animation may be performed after the start of the variable display. In the moving animation of the hold icon, for example, the display of the icon 732aa is gradually lightened, and the icon 732ab moves outward. Finally, the display of the icon 732aa disappears and the icon 732ab is displayed at the position where the icon 732aa was displayed. The start of the variable display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be performed before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, or may be started at the same time. Moreover, the start of the variable display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be performed before the start of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be started at the same time.

101(e), in FIG. 101(f), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a is displayed. Then, the icon 732ab is displayed at the outermost position.

102(a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

103(a) to 103(f) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 102(a) to 102(f), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 102(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is 2. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

Continuing from FIG. 102(a), in FIG. 102(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

102(b), in FIG. 102(c), an effect is performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is a corner region provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. It is displayed at 208j2. In addition, in FIG. 102(c), there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, and the state in which the special figure 1 variable game is suspended is increased by one. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon 732ab for the newly added hold is additionally displayed inside the hold icon 732aa that is displayed on the innermost side of the hold icons that are already displayed. .. In addition, the pattern 703w provided on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The pattern 703w is luminescently displayed so as to surround the additionally displayed icon 732ab. The light emission display of the pattern 703w can be used as a look-ahead effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the result of the above-mentioned look-ahead lottery processing. In this embodiment, after the icon 732ab is displayed, the pattern 703w is displayed by light emission. It should be noted that the pattern 703w may be luminescently displayed simultaneously with the display of the icon 732ab, or the pattern 703w may be luminescently displayed before the display of the icon 732ab.

102D, in FIG. 102D, the effect performed in the central region 208j1 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is advanced. In the effect performed in the central region 208j1, for example, there may be an effect in which the reliability of the big hit is different depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box, and here, when the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variation game. There is. The light emission display of the pattern 703w continues.

In FIG. 102(e) following FIG. 102(d), a pattern 703u provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player) is luminescently displayed. Further, the pattern 703v formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The pattern 703u is luminescently displayed so as to surround the effect (in this case, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variation game. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703w continues. In the present embodiment, the light source (irradiation means) for emitting and displaying the pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v are different (for example, the lens cut direction is different). This makes it possible to display only the pattern 703w and either of the patterns 703u and 703v by light emission (irradiation by only one of the irradiation means) or both of them by light emission (irradiation by both irradiation means). The pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v may have the same light source (irradiation means) for emitting and displaying each. In this embodiment, the pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v are displayed in different colors. The pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v may be light-emitted and displayed in the same color.

102(e), in FIG. 102(f), variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and right symbol display area 208c, and stop display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a. .. In this embodiment, even after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is continued.

102(f), in FIG. 103(a), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c. Even at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u, the light emission display of the pattern 703v, and the light emission display of the pattern 703w are continued.

103(a), in FIG. 103(b), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and shake fluctuation is performed. FIG. 103(b) shows a case where the variation game is out of sync. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped before the start of the fluctuation fluctuation. The light emission display of the pattern 703w continues. In addition, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped after starting the swing fluctuation, or may be stopped at the same time such as the swing fluctuation.

Continuing from FIG. 103(b), in FIG. 103(c), the swing fluctuation continues in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

103(c), in FIG. 103(d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at. The light emission display of the pattern 703w continues. In FIG. 103(d), a fixed display is displayed when the variation game is out of alignment. The light emission display of the pattern 703w may be stopped during the stop display of the decorative design, and may be displayed again so as to surround the hold icon at the start of the next variable display of the decorative design.

In FIG. 103(e), subsequent to FIG. 103(d), in starting the next special figure 1 variable game that has been suspended, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Before the decorative design is variably displayed, the moving animation of the hold icon is started on the decorative design display device 208. It should be noted that a movement animation of the hold icon may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern, or a movement animation may be performed after the start of the variable display. In the moving animation of the hold icon, for example, the display of the icon 732aa is gradually lightened, and the icon 732ab moves outward. Finally, the display of the icon 732aa disappears and the icon 732ab is displayed at the position where the icon 732aa was displayed. The start of the variable display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be performed before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, or may be started at the same time. Moreover, the start of the variable display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be performed before the start of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be started at the same time. In the present embodiment, the amount of light emitted by the irradiation means, which is a light source, is gradually reduced so that the light emission display of the pattern 703w gradually disappears after the hold icon movement animation is started. The light emission display of the pattern 703w may gradually disappear during the movement animation of the hold icon, or the light emission display of the pattern 703w may disappear after the hold icon 732ab is moved. For example, if the LED, which is a light source, is controlled to gradually reduce the brightness, the pattern appears to disappear gradually, and if the LED is controlled to be immediately turned off, the pattern appears to disappear immediately.

103(e), in FIG. 103(f), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a. Then, the icon 732ab is displayed at the outermost position. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is stopped. In the present embodiment, after the icon 732ab is moved, a pattern 703x different from the pattern 703w is displayed by light emission. The pattern 703x emits light so as to surround the moved icon 732ab. It should be noted that the pattern 703x may be light-emitted and displayed before the hold icon 732ab is moved, or the pattern 703x may be light-emitted and displayed while the hold icon 732ab is being moved. The light emission display of the pattern 703x may be such that it gradually becomes brighter (it gradually becomes darker).

It should be noted that the pattern 703x may disappear at the same time as the icon 732ab when the symbol variation started from FIG. 103(e) ends and the next symbol variation starts. Further, the pattern 703x may disappear before the icon 732ab or may disappear after the icon 732ab.

FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed on the game board 200, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

The above-mentioned transparent member 703 is provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern 703y for light emission display of the transparent region provided on the transparent member 703 is a decorative symbol display as seen from the player. It is provided at a position overlapping with the device 208. The pattern 703y is luminescently displayed so as to be overlapped with a portion other than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The pattern 703y includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, a special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a, a special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732b, and a special symbol fourth symbol area. 731a, it may be displayed so as not to overlap the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2, or may be displayed so as to cover a part of any one of them and hide a part thereof, and to any of these You may light-emit and display so that it may overlap and hide everything.

105(a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

106(a) to 106(f) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 105(a) to 105(f), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

107(a) to 107(c) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 106(a) to 106(f), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

FIGS. 108(a) to 108(e) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 107(a) to 107(c), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 105(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is 2. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

Following FIG. 105(a), in FIG. 105(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

105(c), in FIG. 105(c), an effect is performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is a corner region provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. It is displayed at 208j2. In addition, in FIG. 105(c), there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, and the special game 1 variation game is held by 1 more. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon 732ab for the newly added hold is additionally displayed inside the hold icon 732aa that is displayed on the innermost side of the hold icons that are already displayed. ..

In FIG. 105(d), which follows FIG. 105(c), the effect performed in the central area 208j1 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is advanced. In the effect performed in the central region 208j1, for example, there may be an effect in which the reliability of the big hit is different depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box, and here, when the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variation game. There is.

In FIG. 105(e), which follows FIG. 105(d), a pattern 703u provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. Further, the pattern 703v formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) by light emission. The pattern 703u is luminescently displayed so as to surround the effect (in this case, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variation game. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan.

105(e), in FIG. 105(f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. .. In this embodiment, even after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. Is continuing.

Following FIG. 105(f), in FIG. 106(a), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c. Even at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are continued.

106(a), in FIG. 106(b), the swinging pattern is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 106(b), the case where the variation game is out is shown. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped.

Continuing from FIG. 106(b), in FIG. 106(c), the swing fluctuation continues in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

106(c), in FIG. 106(d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at. In FIG. 106(d), a fixed display is displayed when the variation game is out of alignment.

106(d), in FIG. 106(e), when the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the icon 732aa that has been held is started, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a, the outermost position is displayed. The displayed icon 732aa is deleted, and the icon 732ab is moved to the position where the icon 732aa was and displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the pattern 703y applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player). The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started after the icon 732ab is moved. Further, the light emission display of the pattern 703y is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The light emission display of the pattern 703y may be started before the variation of the decorative pattern is started, and the light emission display of the pattern 703y may be performed at the same time as the variation of the decorative pattern is started. The light emission display of the pattern 703y can be used as a look-ahead effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the result of the above-mentioned look-ahead lottery processing for the hold corresponding to the icon 732ab.

106(e), in FIG. 106(f), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues.

After FIG. 106(f), in FIG. 107(a), the swing symbol is displayed while swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, and shake fluctuation is performed. In FIG. 107(a), the case where the variation game is out is shown. The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues.

107(a), in FIG. 107(b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at. In FIG. 107(d), the fixed display is displayed when the variation game is out of alignment. The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues.

107(b), in FIG. 107(c), when the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the icon 732ab that has been held is started, the icon 732ab is gradually displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a. Make it thin and erase. After that, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

Continuing from FIG. 107(c), in FIG. 108(a), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues.

108(a), in FIG. 108(b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reach display is shown. Are doing The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues.

In FIG. 108(c) subsequent to FIG. 108(b), the light emission display of the pattern 703y is stopped. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703y is stopped after the reach display is performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703y may be stopped before performing the reach display, or the light emission display of the pattern 703y may be stopped simultaneously with the reach display.

Continuing from FIG. 108(c), in FIG. 108(d), the swing design is displayed while swinging the decorative design in the left design display region 208a, the middle design display region 208b, and the right design display region 208c, and a fluctuation variation is performed. FIG. 108(d) shows a case where the variation game is out of sync.

108(d), in FIG. 108(e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Displays a stop. In FIG. 108(e), the fixed display is displayed when the variation game is out of alignment.

In this example, the pattern 703y used as the prefetch effect and the patterns 703u and 703v that are not the prefetch effect are not displayed at the same time. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the display of the decorative pattern or the like displayed on the display unit such as the decorative pattern display device 208 from being difficult to see due to the light emission of the pattern. The pattern 703y used as the prefetching effect and the patterns 703u and 703v that are not the prefetching effect may be displayed at the same time.

FIGS. 109(a) and (b) and FIGS. 110(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining an example of the effect performed on the game board 200, and are schematic front views of the game board 200 seen from the front. is there. The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example of FIG. 109(a), the state of the big hit start display in which the start of the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this embodiment, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed during the big hit start display. Further, the variable winning a prize port 234 is not opened during the big hit start display. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member during the big hit start display. The variable winning port 234 may be opened during the big hit start display.

In the example of FIG. 109(b), the opening/closing control of the door member 234a is performed a predetermined number of times in the processing at the time of a big hit (in the case of the present embodiment, if it is a 15 round big hit, 15 times, if it is a 2 round big hit, (2 times) This shows the state during round display in which the decorative pattern display device 208 is displaying the number of rounds this time. In FIG. 109(b), "5R", which is the number of rounds this time, is displayed on the round display unit 208k, and "7" is displayed on the winning symbol display unit 208m showing the decorative symbol stopped and displayed at the time of winning this big hit. it's shown. In the present embodiment, the patterns 703A, 703B, 703C, and 703D provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) are luminescently displayed.

In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed during the round display. In the display between rounds (for example, when switching from 5R to 6R), the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is not performed during the round display (for example, during the display of the two-dimensional code on the decorative pattern display device 208 or during the probable change promotion effect, the pending residence There is a case that the light emitting display of the pattern given to the transparent member is not performed during the suggestive production). In addition, the display of the pattern applied to the transparent member may not be performed during the display between rounds.

It should be noted that the luminescent display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be such that all the patterns are always lit in the same color, or any of the patterns may or may not be lit. The pattern may be displayed in different colors and may be displayed in different ways.

In the present embodiment, the pattern 703D is luminescently displayed so as to hide the winning symbol display portion 208m. The winning symbol display portion 208m may not be hidden. In the present embodiment, the round display portion 208k is not hidden by the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member. The round display portion 208k may be hidden by the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member.

In the present embodiment, the pattern 703C is luminescently displayed so as to cover the variable winning port 234 on the right side, and is further luminescently displayed so as to partially cover the special figure 2 starting port 232. In addition, at least the light emission display of the pattern is performed both while the variable winning port 234 is opened and when the variable winning port 234 is closed. In addition, the luminescent display of the pattern provided on the transmissive member may not cover the periphery of the variable winning port 234, or may not cover a part of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be performed only while the variable winning port 234 is open, or the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be performed only while the variable winning port 234 is closed. May be.

In the example of FIG. 110(a), the lower plate full tank error is displayed in the error display field 208n of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the present embodiment, the patterns 703A, 703B, 703C, and 703D provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) are luminescently displayed.

In the present embodiment, even when an error is displayed in the error display field 208n, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed as before the error display. It should be noted that during the error display (including the lower plate full tank error), the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may not be performed, and a specific error display (for example, magnetic detection related to a so-called goto action or a payout system). In the case of a serious error such as an error), the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transmissive member may not be performed. Further, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member during the error display may be the same display mode as that during the big hit or may be the display mode different from that during the big hit. In FIG. 110(a), four heart-shaped patterns are luminescently displayed as the patterns applied to the transmissive member, but the number may be 0 or any number. In this embodiment, the pattern 703C is displayed so as to cover the right variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 234 is open and is not covered by the pattern applied to the transparent member. The variable winning a prize mouth 234 in the center is closed. That is, it is possible to perform light emission display so that only the open variable winning opening 234 is covered with a pattern formed on the transparent member.

In the example of FIG. 110(b), the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is not performed during the display of the next game state such as the probability variation plunge. The light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed even during the display showing the next game state. In that case, in the same display mode as the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member during the big hit. It may be performed or may be different.

FIGS. 111(a) and 111(b) are diagrams for explaining an example of effects performed on the game board 200, and are schematic front views of the game board 200 seen from the front. The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The example of FIG. 111(a) shows a state in which the frame lamp 122 is turned on. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed while a frame such as the frame lamp 122 or a lamp on the board (including an LED, for example) is lit. In addition, even when the lamp of the frame or the board is turned on, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed.

The example of FIG. 111B shows a state in which the frame lamp 122 is not lit. In this embodiment, a pattern 703E applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player) is light-emitted while the frame lamp such as the frame lamp 122 and the lamp of the board (including the LED, for example) are turned off. To do. The pattern 703E is a pattern in which a logo display such as "Yoshimune" related to the model name of the gaming machine is displayed by light emission. The light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed while the lamp of the frame or the board is turned on.
Glass emission is performed while the LEDs on the frame and board are off. It should be noted that, by the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transparent member, it is possible to display advertisements (game table manufacturer name, model name, specifications) and system display (right-handed suggestion display, display for brightness adjustment, etc.). Good.

Further, for example, by changing the mode such as the energy saving mode, control may be performed so as to switch between the mode for performing the control in FIG. 111(a) and the mode for performing the control in FIG. 111(b).

FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed on the game board 200, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power of the gaming table 100 is turned on (including power recovery after power interruption), the lamps on the frame side (for example, the frame lamp 122) and the light emission display of the pattern 703F provided on the transparent member are simultaneously emitted. Do not turn on the lamp on the board. In addition, after the lamp on the frame side is turned on, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed, or vice versa. Also, the lamp on the panel side may be turned on when the power is turned on. It should be noted that when the power is turned on, the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may not be performed. Also, all combinations of these are possible.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

A liquid crystal display device 208A is provided above the decorative pattern display device 208, and shutters 246A and 246B for driving the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208A to be opened and closed are provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 208A.

114(a) to 114(d) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

115(a) to 115(d) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 114(a) to 114(d), a specific example of an effect by display and light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order. ..

116(a) to 116(d) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 115(a) to 115(d), a specific example of the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the effect of emitting the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

117(a) to (b) are diagrams showing, in succession to FIGS. 116(a) to (d), a specific example of the effect of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion. ..

In FIG. 114(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game holding number is four. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. A liquid crystal display device 208A is provided above the decorative pattern display device 208. Although the liquid crystal display device 208A is provided with shutters 246A and 246B that drive the display area thereof to be openable and closable, the liquid crystal display device 208A may not be provided with the shutters 246A and 246B. Further, the liquid crystal display device 208A may display the same information as that of the decorative pattern display device 208. For example, a background display, a hold display, a notice or a decorative pattern that indicates the reliability of the fluctuation, a fourth pattern, or the like. May be displayed.

114(a), in FIG. 114(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

114(c) subsequent to FIG. 114(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display. In FIG. 114(c), a pattern 703t formed on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703t hides one of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (in the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 114(d)). The display is illuminated so that the decorative pattern is hidden. In addition, you may make it light-emit and display by the pattern given to the transparent member 703 so that a plurality of decorative symbols and effect display may be hidden, and the light-emission display of the pattern given to the transparent member 703 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be provided on the front side of at least a part of another decorative pattern to be displayed or the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the other transparent portion.

The liquid crystal display device 208A is a movable movable body, and FIG. 114(c) shows the liquid crystal display device 208A at the position before the movement. In FIG. 114(c), the pattern applied to the transmissive member displays light emission at a position not covering the liquid crystal display device 208A before the movement. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member in the position which covers the liquid crystal display device 208A before the movement. Further, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed at a position that covers both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the liquid crystal display device 208A before the movement.

114(c), in FIG. 114(d), the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a is stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t continues.

114(d), in FIG. 115(a), the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is stopped and displayed, and the reach display is performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t continues. The reach display is also performed on the liquid crystal display device 208A.

115(a), in FIG. 115(b), in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, super reach effect which is a reach accompanied by switching of the screen background is performed, and in the liquid crystal display device 208A, the decorative symbol is displayed. Reach display in variable display. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is stopped before switching to the super reach effect. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703t may disappear during the switching from FIG. 115(a) to 115(b), or the light emission display of the pattern 703t may disappear after switching to the super reach effect. Further, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be continued. In that case, the display mode of the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be the light emitting display of the pattern 703t as in FIG. 115(a), or may be different.

115(c), in FIG. 115(c), at a certain timing during the super reach effect, the pattern is in a display mode different from the pattern 703t (for example, the same pattern but different size), The light emission display of the pattern 703G applied to the transmissive member 703 is performed. This pattern 703G also performs light emission display at a position that does not cover the liquid crystal display device 208A before movement. Note that the patterns 703t and 703G may be patterns that are made to stand out by causing a plurality of light sources at different positions to emit light. When the pattern 703t emits light, the light source that emits the pattern 703G may be turned off. Good. Alternatively, the reverse may be possible.

In FIG. 115(d), which follows FIG. 115(c), the effect is advanced in the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 116(a) following FIG. 115(d), the liquid crystal display device 208A starts moving before the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The liquid crystal display device 208A displays the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern. The liquid crystal display device 208A may start moving simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the liquid crystal display device 208A may start moving after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, while the liquid crystal display device 208A is moving, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed, but the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. In that case, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed before the movement of the liquid crystal display device 208A, during the movement, or after the movement.

In FIG. 116(b), which follows FIG. 116(a), the liquid crystal display device 208A moves to the position of the central region 208j1 of the decorative pattern display device 208. Even after the movement of the liquid crystal display device 208A, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed. At this time, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. In that case, the luminescent display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be performed so as to hide at least a part of the decorative pattern, or the luminescent display of the pattern may be performed so as not to be hidden.

In FIG. 116(c), which follows FIG. 116(b), the liquid crystal display device 208A returns from the position of the central region 208j1 of the decorative pattern display device 208 to the upper part of the original decorative pattern display device 208. Even when the liquid crystal display device 208A returns, the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transmissive member is not performed. At this time, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed.

In FIG. 116(d), which follows FIG. 116(c), the liquid crystal display device 208A has returned to the upper portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 117(a), which is subsequent to FIG. 116(d), the swinging pattern is displayed by swinging the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. In the liquid crystal display device 208A, at the same time that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts switching from the super reach effect to the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation display of the displayed decorative symbol disappears. The erasing of the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 208A may be erased before or after the start of switching to the stop display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display device 208.

117(a), in FIG. 117(b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a. Stop display is performed at.

118(a) to 118(f) are diagrams showing, in order, a specific example of a display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect by light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 118(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special game 1 variable game holding number is four. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

118(a), in FIG. 118(b), the suspended special figure 1 variation game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The variable display is performed, and in the reserved icon display area 732a for special figure 1, the icon that is displayed at the outermost side is erased, and the other icons are sequentially displayed while being shifted toward the outer side. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is variably displayed.

In FIG. 118(c) subsequent to FIG. 118(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display. In FIG. 118(c), a pattern 703t provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed.

In FIG. 118(d), which follows FIG. 118(c), the error display field 208n of the decorative design display device 208 shows a state in which an error requesting a staff member is displayed. This error may be, for example, a serious error such as a magnetic detection related to a so-called goto action or an error in a payout system, or an error in which a game cannot be continued. The luminescent display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is erased before this error display is displayed. The luminescent display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off at the same timing as the error display, or the luminescent display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off after the error display is displayed.

In FIG. 118(e) subsequent to FIG. 118(d), error display in the error display field 208n of the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

After FIG. 118(e), in FIG. 118(f), error display is continued in the error display field 208n of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed during the error display. In that case, the light emission display of the pattern different from that before the error display may be performed, or the light emission display of the pattern in the same display manner as before the error display may be performed. When the error is eliminated, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. Depending on the type of error, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed. For example, the light emission display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be performed at the time of the door opening notification, and the light emission display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may not be performed at the time of an error of an unauthorized system. It may be possible to give a penalty to an improper player without giving a disadvantage to a player who is playing the game correctly.

119(a) to 119(f) are diagrams sequentially showing specific examples of demonstration screen display and light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion in the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 119(a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and a demo image is displayed in the background. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 are stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 119(b) subsequent to FIG. 119(a), a display indicating that the option menu can be displayed is displayed in the display field 208o. The decorative symbol display device 208 may display the symbols stopped during the symbol fluctuation stop. Even when the display field 208o as shown in FIG. 119(b) is displayed, the option menu cannot be displayed for a predetermined time after the symbol stop (for example, 1.5 seconds after the symbol stop) and can be displayed. Then, the display as shown in FIG. 119(b) may be performed. Further, the display of FIG. 119(b) may not be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after the display becomes possible) even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols stopped.

In FIG. 119(c), which follows FIG. 119(b), a pattern 703H applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703H is light-emitted and displayed so as to hide a part of the display field 208o.

In FIG. 119(c) following FIG. 119(c), a display indicating that the menu can be displayed even while the demonstration video such as the display of the title of the game machine model is flowing (display column 208o) You may go. In this case, the display indicating that the menu can be displayed (display column 208o) may not be performed. At this time, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. It should be noted that the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed.

119(d), in FIG. 119(e), when the player presses the chance button 136 with reference to the display in the display field 208o, the gaming table 100 receives this and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Display the option menu. When the option menu is displayed by the player's operation, the light emission display of the pattern 703H provided on the transparent member 703 is stopped, and the light emission display of the pattern provided on the transparent member is turned off. In this embodiment, the luminescent display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is extinguished after the player's operation. Note that the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be turned off at the same time as the player's operation. In FIG. 119(e), it is possible to select and input operations such as "user MENU", "model information", "big hit history", "sound adjustment", "brightness adjustment" as an option menu. For these operations, the player operates the operation button 136a, for example, to perform an operation input to the game table 100.

Following FIG. 119(e), FIG. 119(f) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 when the player selects “sound adjustment” in FIG. 119(e). On this screen, the player can operate the operation button 136a, for example, to make an operation input to the game table 100 and adjust the volume. The pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed on the screen on which the player operates. The pattern applied to the transparent member may be displayed on the screen operated by the player.

In addition, in the option menu of FIG. 119(e), the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is continued, and the next screens after the player operates the option menu are the "user MENU screen" and the "model information screen". , The “big hit history screen”, the “sound adjustment screen” (FIG. 119(f)), the “brightness adjustment screen”, or the like, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transparent member may not be performed. In this case, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transparent member may be turned off after the display is switched to the next screen after the operation by the player in the option menu. It should be noted that in the option menu, the display may be switched to the next screen after being operated by the player, and at the same time, the light emission display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be turned off. In addition, in the option menu, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transparent member may be turned off before the display is switched to the next screen after the operation by the player. Further, in the option menu, the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be turned off after the player operates it. It should be noted that in the option menu, the light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be turned off at the same time when the player operates it. In the option menu, the light-emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be turned off before the player operates it.

120(a) to 120(f) are diagrams sequentially showing specific examples of demonstration screen display and light emission of the pattern of the transparent portion in the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 120(a), decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and a demo image is displayed in the background. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 are stopped and displayed.

120B, a display indicating that the menu can be displayed is displayed in the display field 208o in FIG. 120B. The decorative symbol display device 208 may display the symbols stopped during the symbol fluctuation stop. Even when displaying the display field 208o as shown in FIG. 120(b), the menu cannot be displayed for a predetermined time from the symbol stop (for example, 1.5 seconds from the symbol stop), and display is possible. After that, the display as shown in FIG. 120(b) may be performed. Further, the display of FIG. 120(b) may not be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after the display becomes possible) even if a predetermined time has passed since the symbols stopped.

120(c), in FIG. 120(c), a pattern 703H applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the side of the player) is luminescently displayed. The pattern 703H is light-emitted and displayed so as to hide a part of the display field 208o.

120(c), in FIG. 120(d), a display indicating that the menu can be displayed even while the demonstration video such as the display of the title of the model of the game machine is flowing (display column 208o). You may go. In this case, the display indicating that the menu can be displayed (display column 208o) may not be performed. At this time as well, light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. It should be noted that the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed.

120(d), in FIG. 120(e), when the player refers to the display in the display field 208o and presses the chance button 136, the game table 100 receives this and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Display the menu. At this time, a display for guiding the player to the operation on the menu screen is displayed in the operation guidance display field 208s at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, icons 208p, 208q and 208r are displayed in the operation guidance display field 208s. The icon 208p and the icon 208q are icons corresponding to the operation button 136a, and the icon 208r is an icon corresponding to the chance button 136. The operation button 136a is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the operation guidance display field 208s, the icon 208p indicates, for example, colored buttons (four buttons on the left, right, top and bottom) used for selecting items on the menu screen among the operation buttons 136a. In the icon 208q, the button (one central button) used for determining the selection item on the menu screen among the operation buttons 136a is displayed with, for example, a color, and the icon 208r gives an opportunity to determine the selection item on the menu screen. Indicates that button 136 can also be used. When the menu is displayed by the operation of the player, the light emission display of the pattern 703H provided on the transparent member 703 is continued. In this embodiment, the pattern 703H is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the operation guidance display field 208s. The light emitting display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may not hide the operation guidance display field 208s. In the present embodiment, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed in the same display mode after the menu is displayed and after the menu is displayed. It should be noted that the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member in different display modes (at least one or more of the number, color, shape, size, brightness, display position, etc. of the pattern is different) before and after displaying the menu You may go. In FIG. 120(e), operations such as “member registration”, “password input”, “issue two-dimensional code”, “clear personal data”, and “end” can be selected and input as a menu. For these operations, the player operates the operation button 136a, for example, to perform an operation input to the game table 100.

120(e), FIG. 120(f) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 when the player selects “member registration” in FIG. 120(e). On this screen, the two-dimensional code is displayed, and the player who has acquired the password using this two-dimensional code operates the operation button 136a, for example, to input the password to the gaming table 100 and register as a member. It can be performed. During the display of the two-dimensional code, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is not performed. When the light emitting display is performed, it may be difficult to read the two-dimensional code, which may be inconvenient for the player. In addition, you may make it perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member, while displaying a two-dimensional code. Further, while the two-dimensional code is being displayed, all the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the game table 100 and the game board 200 are turned off. Note that any one of the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the game table 100 or the game board 200 may be turned on while the two-dimensional code is displayed.

Alternatively, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off after the two-dimensional code is displayed. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off at the same time that the two-dimensional code is displayed. It should be noted that the luminescent display of the pattern provided on the transparent member may be turned off before the two-dimensional code is displayed.

Further, after the two-dimensional code is displayed, the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 or the lamp provided on the game board 200 may be turned off. At the same time as displaying the two-dimensional code, the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 or the lamp provided on the game board 200 may be turned off. The lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the game table 100 or the game board 200 may be turned off before displaying the two-dimensional code.

121(a) to 121(d) are views for explaining an example of the effect performed on the game board 200, which is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 121(a), for example, during a special figure variation game, a pattern 703J applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) is luminescently displayed.

In FIG. 121(b), for example, during the special figure variation game, the patterns 703J and 703K applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) are luminescently displayed.

In FIG. 121(c), for example, during the special figure variation game, patterns 703J, 703K, and 703L provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) are luminescently displayed.

In FIG. 121(d), patterns 703J, 703K, 703L, and 703M applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) are light-emitted and displayed, for example, during a special figure variation game.

In the present embodiment, the display mode (the number, the color, the shape, the size, and the brightness of the pattern) applied to the transmissive member that emits light during the special figure variation game (may be the general figure variation game). , At least one or more of the display position, etc.) suggests the reliability of the big hit in the special figure variation game. For example, the reliability increases in the order of FIG. 121(a)<FIG. 121(b)<FIG. 121(c)<FIG. 121(d). The suggestion of the reliability may be for the variation game, or may be an indication of the reliability of the big hit of the variation game after the next time.

<Appendix 1>
In addition, the present invention described above is
1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
Comprises a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating the transparent region with light,
At least the direction changing means is provided in the first area and the second area in the transmission area,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Since the first area is a gaming table characterized by being capable of emitting light brighter than the second area,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, it may be possible to perform various display modes by creating bright areas and dark areas by light emission.

Further, by creating a bright region and a dark region by light emission, it may be possible to improve the decorative effect in the bright region and improve the visibility of the game region in the dark region. It may be possible to prevent the game from being hindered while improving the effect of production.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. In the game table described in,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The first light emitting means has a first number of light sources arranged at a first distance,
The second light emitting means has a second number of light sources arranged at a second distance,
Since the first interval is shorter than the second interval, the gaming table,
It may be possible to enhance the decorative effect by avoiding areas that you do not want to lighten.

The present invention also provides
3.
2. In the game table described in,
Of the light sources directed to the first area, the distance from the light source closest to the first area to the first area is a first distance,
Among the light sources directed to the second area, the distance from the light source closest to the second area to the second area is the second distance,
Since the first distance is closer to the second distance than the second distance,
It may be possible to enhance the decorative effect by avoiding areas that you do not want to lighten.

The present invention also provides
4.
1. Through 3. In the gaming table according to any one of the above,
The first light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means has a first curved surface,
The second light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means has a second curved surface that is larger than the curvature of the first curved surface and that includes at least a predetermined section that has the largest curvature in the second light emitting means. Because it was a gaming machine,
In some cases, it is possible to change the brightness without changing the arrangement position of the light emitting unit.

In addition, even if the same decoration is used, the appearance may be different depending on the direction of the light emitting means.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. Through 4. In the gaming table according to any one of the above,
Since the first area is provided with a greater number of the direction changing means than the second area,
By reducing the direction changing means in the region where the visibility is desired to be improved, it may be possible to improve the contrast between bright and dark areas.

In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of decoration and enhance the decoration effect by changing the density of the direction changing means.

<Appendix 2>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
An image display unit capable of visually recognizing an image from the front side through the transparent region,
Decoration means with decoration,
A gaming machine equipped with
The decoration means is provided at least at a position higher than the image display means,
The image display means is capable of performing at least variable display of decorative symbols,
Comprises a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating the transparent region with light,
At least a direction changing unit is provided in the plurality of regions in the transmission region,
At least one region of the plurality of regions is a first region,
At least one region of the plurality of regions is a second region,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means at least to the front side,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a changing decorative pattern in a first display area which is a partial display area of the image display means,
At least a part of the first region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the region in the first display region,
At least a part of the second region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the decoration means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. In the game table described in,
The transparent area is provided with at least a third area,
The third region is a region where the direction changing means is not provided,
At least a part of the third area is provided on the front side of at least a part of the area in the first display area,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
3.
2. In the game table described in,
In the game area, a rolling area in which a game ball can roll is provided,
At least a part of the third region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the rolling region,
It was a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
4.
3. In the game table described in,
At least one region of the plurality of regions is a fourth region,
The fourth region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the rolling region,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
5.
4. In the game table described in,
Both the height and the width of the first region are larger than the diameter of the game ball,
At least one of the height and width of the fourth region is smaller than the diameter of the game ball,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Other configurations>
By the way, it is conceivable to provide a strip-shaped substrate having a plurality of light emitting portions in the frame of the glass unit, but in the present invention, the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means having a characteristic configuration is further changed. It has a direction changing means for changing to the person side.

Further, the present invention is
1-1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided in a region other than the area through which the game ball passes,
It may be a gaming table, which is characterized by
1-2.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided in a region where the game ball does not pass,
It may be a gaming table, which is characterized by
1-3.
1-1. In the game table described in,
The area where the game ball passes is
Around the launch rail,
Around the nail where the game ball hits first,
Starting port (first special drawing starting port, second special drawing starting port, universal starting port (called gate or through chucker)),
Windmill (ball striking member)
May be a gaming table, characterized by including,
1-4.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
In the region where the game ball passes, the direction changing means may be a gaming table characterized by changing the traveling direction of light to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball to the player side,
1-5.
In the game table described in 1-2,
The area where the game ball does not pass,
In some cases, it is a gaming table, which is an area in which a game ball cannot pass (a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming area, a movable object, etc.),
1-6.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided in a region other than a region of the device for displaying information about the game (for example, a region where a special figure display device, a universal figure display device, a holding lamp, etc. are arranged, a region where the fourth symbol is displayed). Has been
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that, in this case, the state of the game (whether the symbol is changing? Stopped? Hold is stored? High probability? Big hit? , Etc.) may be always visible, and it may be possible to prevent the progress of the game from being affected.
Further, according to each of the above configurations,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game. In addition, it may be possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (liquid crystal, movable object, etc.).

Further, the present invention is
2-1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
There is a case where the light whose direction of travel is changed to the player side by the direction changing means is a game table characterized by displaying a predetermined pattern by light emission.
2-2.
2-1. In the game table described in,
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area.

The predetermined pattern is the first region,
It may be a gaming table, which is characterized by
2-3.
2-1. In the game table described in,
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area.

The predetermined pattern is other than the second region,
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that, in this case, for example, a part that does not shine at all, or a part that shines a little out of the pattern may be the second region,
2-4.
2-1. In the game table described in,
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
The predetermined pattern is constituted by both the first region (bright part) and the second region (a part darker than the first region but shining or no shining). In this case, it may be possible to display a predetermined pattern including the area through which the game ball passes, and in some cases the location or size of the predetermined pattern may not be selected. ,
Further, according to each of the above-described configurations, the decorative effect may be enhanced in some cases.

The present invention also provides
3-1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
There may be a gaming table characterized in that the light emitting means is provided in a portion closest to the first region or the second region and a portion facing the closest region,
3-2.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
There may be a game table characterized in that each of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged at equal intervals (or approximately equal intervals). In this case, the position of the pattern (first area) to be displayed by light emission or It may be possible to emit light regardless of the shape,
3-3.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
Each of the plurality of light emitting means may be a game table characterized in that it is provided along a line connecting predetermined portions (center portion, end portion, etc.) of the light emitting means,
3-4.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
Each of the plurality of light emitting means may be a gaming table, which is provided in a line on the same straight line,
3-4'.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
Each of the plurality of light emitting means may be a game table, which is provided in a plurality of rows,
3-5.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
In some cases, the gaming table is characterized in that the distance from the plurality of light emitting means to the direction changing means can be different,
3-6.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
In some cases, the brightness of the first area and the second area is variable, and in this case, a dramatic effect (for example, a big hit depending on whether the pattern is clearly visible or invisible) (You can have different expectations for) or you can improve the decorative effect,
Further, according to each of the above-described configurations, the decorative effect may be enhanced in some cases.

The present invention also provides
4-1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
Direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Equipped with
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area,
The light emitting means may be a game table, wherein a predetermined number is arranged on a predetermined substrate,
4-2.
4-1. In the game table described in,
The predetermined substrate is one (for example, it may be a flexible substrate)
It may be a gaming table, which is characterized by
4-3.
4-1. In the game table described in,
The predetermined substrate is a plurality of substrates (for example, it may be a rigid substrate)
It may be a gaming table, which is characterized by
4-4.
4-3. In the game table described in,
The plurality of predetermined substrates include a first substrate and a second substrate, and the length of the first substrate and the length of the second substrate are the same (substantially the same), May be a gaming table,
4-5.
4-3. In the game table described in,
The plurality of predetermined substrates includes a first substrate and a second substrate, wherein the length of the first substrate is longer than the length of the second substrate. Sometimes,
4-6.
4-3. In the game table described in,
The plurality of predetermined substrates includes a first substrate and a second substrate, wherein the length of the first substrate is shorter than the length of the second substrate. Sometimes,
Moreover, according to each of the above-described configurations, the decorative effect may be enhanced if the predetermined substrate is one, and if the predetermined substrates are plural, the substrates are arranged according to the shape of the frame. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent damage to the components mounted on the board and the board itself.

The present invention also provides
5-1.
4-1. In the game table described in,
The board connector may be a game table, which is arranged around a predetermined portion of the frame member,
5-2.
5-1. In the game table described in,
The predetermined portion is at least the periphery of the speaker provided on the door.
It may be a gaming table, which is characterized by
5-3.
5-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the predetermined portion, a game table characterized by being at least four corners of the opening,
Further, according to each of the above-described configurations, the connector can be concentrated in a predetermined part in some cases, and the maintainability can be improved in some cases.

The present invention also provides
6-1.
4-1. In the game table described in,
There may be a game table characterized in that the board is not provided on a predetermined surface of the surfaces on which the board can be installed,
6-2.
6-1. In the game table described in,
The surface on which the substrate is not provided may be a game table characterized in that the angle is a tight portion, and in this case, damage to the substrate may be prevented in some cases.
6-3.
6-1. In the game table described in,
The surface on which the substrate is not provided may be a gaming table characterized in that a separate member (for example, a handle) is provided in the transparent region, and in this case, the separate member is loaded by the load of the transparent region. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the (for example, handle) from being removed, and in some cases, it may be possible to increase the strength of the joint between another member (for example, the handle) and the transparent region.
6-4.
6-1. In the game table described in,
The part where the substrate is not provided may be a gaming table, which is the same color as or close to the installation surface of the substrate of the part where the substrate is provided,
6-5.
6-1. In the game table described in,
The part where the substrate is not provided may be a game table characterized by a color that reflects light (for example, white). In this case, the light emitting means is installed by reflecting the light. You may be able to emit light from the surface that is not
Further, according to each of the above configurations, it may be possible to prevent damage to the transmissive region and the substrate.

The present invention also provides
7-1.
4-1. In the game table described in,
The predetermined substrate may be a game table, which is provided along a surface on which the substrate can be installed,
7-2.
7-1. In the game table described in,
The board installable surface may be a game table, which is a curved surface or a flat surface,
7-3.
7-2. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the game table is characterized in that the direction of light is determined by the direction of the curved surface or plane of the surface on which the substrate can be installed,
7-4.
7-2. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the gaming board is characterized in that the predetermined substrate has a different brightness depending on whether it is provided on a flat surface or a curved surface,
7-5.
7-1. In the game table described in,
The surface on which the substrate can be installed may be a game table, which is provided on a support frame,
7-6.
7-1. In the game table described in,
The surface on which the substrate can be installed may be a game table, which is provided other than a support frame,
Further, according to each of the above-described configurations, there are cases where the lightness can be made different without changing the arrangement position of the light emitting means, and the appearance can be made different depending on the direction in which the light emitting means faces even with the same decoration. There is.

The present invention also provides
8-1.
4-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the light emitting means is a game table, which is mounted on the predetermined board by a plurality of predetermined numbers (two or three) electrically connected in series,
Further, according to each of the above-mentioned configurations, when the light emitting means is damaged, the light emitting means connected in series also does not emit light, so it may be easy to notice the damage of the light emitting means, and the maintainability may be improved. is there.

The present invention also provides
9-1.
4-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, a gaming table, characterized in that a member for fixing the substrate is provided in the transparent region,
9-2.
4-1. In the game table described in,
The substrate may be a game table characterized by having a hole for screwing in the transparent region, and in this case, when the substrate is bent and fixed, the position for fixing the substrate may be displaced. There are cases where the holes are widened (widened in the longitudinal direction of the substrate).
9-3.
4-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the game table is characterized in that it has a claw portion for fixing the substrate to a support frame,
Further, according to each of the above-described configurations, it may be possible to prevent the position of the light emitting unit from being displaced, and to prevent a region to be brightened from becoming dark or a region to be darkened from being brightened.

The present invention also provides
10-1.
1-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the game machine is characterized in that the shape of the direction changing means (for example, the shape of each part that reflects light) is the same,
10-2.
1-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the game machine is characterized in that the shape of the direction changing means (for example, the shape of each part that reflects light) is different for each area,
10-3.
1-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the gaming machine is characterized in that the number of the direction changing means is the same regardless of the area.
10-4.
1-1. In the game table described in,
In some cases, the game machine is characterized in that the number of the direction changing means is different for each area, and in this case, the number of the direction changing means provided in the first area is the second area. The number of the direction changing means may be larger (or smaller) than the number of the direction changing means provided, and the number of the direction changing means may be the case that the number of the direction changing means is zero.

The present invention also provides
11-1.
1-1. In the game table described in,
The first area may be a portion on the game board that a game ball does not pass through, and the second area may be a gaming table characterized by other portions, and the area is a game. In some cases, it is formed continuously over a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The present invention also provides
12-1.
1-1. In the game table described in,
Two light sources for irradiating the specific direction changing means and the specific direction changing means (first light source, second light source),
Between the specific direction changing means and the first light source, a transparent area is provided for allowing the player to visually recognize the symbol display means (the special figure display means, a portion of the lamp or the like that should not be made bright).
A transparent area is provided between the specific direction changing means and the second light source to allow the player to visually recognize the transparent moving means.
In some cases, the game machine is characterized in that the distance between the specific direction changing means and the second light source is shorter than the distance between the specific direction changing means and the first light source, and in this case, the first light source. There is a case where it is possible to prevent the light from being dispersed and the special figure display device side being illuminated brightly because the distance from the specific direction changing means is away from.

(Other)
The present invention may have the following configurations.

The direction changing means may be provided in a predetermined area other than the two areas of the first area and the second area in the transmissive area.

The direction changing means may be provided in the first region as much as possible, and does not need to be provided in the entire region without a gap.

The direction changing means need only be provided in the second area as much as possible, and does not need to be provided in the entire area without a gap.

When the direction changing means is based on a predetermined shape of the transmissive area for directing the traveling direction of light to the player side, the predetermined number of shapes, the predetermined shape type, and the predetermined area of the transmissive area. 13 may be arbitrarily determined in order to determine the brightness. The transparent region may include a region in which the game region can be transmitted to the player, and FIG. The transparent portion 700 (glass unit) may be applied.

For the transmissive region, one transmissive member (transmissive member 703 or the like) may be applied, or a plurality of transmissive members (transmissive member 703 or the like) may be applied.

For the transmissive region, one piece of glass (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.) may be applied, or a plurality of pieces of glass (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.) may be applied.

For the transmissive region, one transmissive member (transmissive member 703 or the like) may be applied, or a plurality of transmissive members (transmissive member 703 or the like) may be applied.

The combination of one or more glass (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.) and one or more transmissive members (transmissive member 703, etc.) may be applied to the transmissive region.

-One or more other transparent members (a predetermined member other than the transparent member 703, the outer glass 705, and the inner glass 706) may be applied to the transparent region.

The transmissive region includes one or more glass (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.), one or more transmissive members (transmissive member 703, etc.), and one or more other transmissive members ( A predetermined member other than the transmissive member 703, the outer glass 705, and the inner glass 706) and any combination thereof may be applied.

-All the light emitting means may have the same maximum brightness capable of emitting light, or may have the same minimum brightness.

-Each of the light emitting means may have different maximum brightness capable of emitting light, or may have different minimum brightness.

All the light emitting means provided around the transmissive area and emitting light toward the side surface of the transmissive area may have the same maximum brightness capable of emitting light, or have the same minimum brightness. Good.

-Each of the light emitting means provided around the transmissive area and emitting light toward the side surface of the transmissive area may have different maximum brightness or different minimum brightness. ..

The following configurations are described in all the embodiments.
That is, a game result display means capable of notifying the result of the game,
On the front side of the game result display means, a transparent area that faces at least the game result display means,
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating the transparent region with light,
At least the direction changing means is provided in the first area and the second area in the transmission area,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
The first area is a gaming table that is capable of emitting light brighter than the second area. If this gaming table is used, the enjoyment of the game is improved. You can

The game result display means may be a reel of a slot machine or a game board of a pachinko machine.

The first area (bright) and the second area (dark) may have the following configurations.

-Both the first region and the second region may have a predetermined shape.

Both the first area and the second area may be areas in which a pattern of a predetermined shape is displayed by the light whose traveling direction is changed by the direction changing means.

The predetermined shape is, for example, a predetermined character shape, a predetermined character shape, a predetermined character string shape, a predetermined number shape, a predetermined person shape, a predetermined human face shape, a predetermined animal shape, The shape of the face of a predetermined animal, the same shape as the design displayed by the rendering means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 208, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.) or a related shape may be used.

The above-mentioned predetermined shape pattern may be, for example, the above-mentioned predetermined shape having a predetermined pattern, or the outer shape of the predetermined shape having a predetermined pattern.

The position in the transparent area of the first region may be higher than the position in the transparent area of the second region.

At this time, the number of light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region may be larger than the number of light emitting means arranged below the transmissive region, or the number of adjacent light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region may be increased. The space between any two suitable light emitting means may be smaller than the space between any two adjacent light emitting means arranged below the transmissive region.

The position in the transparent area of the first region may be lower than the position in the transparent area of the second region.

At that time, the number of light emitting means arranged below the transmissive region may be larger than the number of light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region, or the light emitting means is arranged below the transmissive region. The distance between any two adjacent light emitting means may be smaller than the distance between any two adjacent light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region.

The position that can be placed in the transparent area of the first region may be a position to the left of the position that can be placed in the transparent area of the second region.

At that time, the number of light emitting means arranged on the left side of the transmissive region may be larger than the number of light emitting means arranged on the right side of the transmissive region, or adjacent to each other arranged on the left side of the transmissive region. The distance between any two light emitting means may be smaller than the distance between any two adjacent light emitting means arranged on the right side of the transmissive region.

The position that can be placed in the transparent area of the first region may be the position to the right of the position that can be placed in the transparent area of the second region. At that time, the number of light emitting means arranged on the right side of the transmissive region may be larger than the number of light emitting means arranged on the left side of the transmissive region, or adjacent to each other arranged on the right side of the transmissive region. The distance between any two light emitting means may be narrower than the distance between any two adjacent light emitting means arranged on the left side of the transmissive region.

The distance between any two adjacent light-emitting means arranged closest to the first region is smaller than the distance between any two adjacent light-emitting means arranged closest to the second region Good.

The distance from the first area to the light emitting means closest to the first area is shorter than the distance from the second area to the light emitting means closest to the second area. May be.

The number of light emitting means facing the first region may be larger than the number of light emitting means facing the second region.

-The size of the first region may be larger than the size of the second region.

-The size of the first area may be smaller than the size of the second area.

<Appendix 3>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board provided with a game area,
A transparent area provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the game area,
A symbol display means capable of at least executing variable display of symbols,
An image display unit that is separate from the symbol display unit and that allows an image to be viewed from the front side through the transparent region,
A starting opening provided in the game area,
In the case where a game ball is won in the starting opening, a win/loss determination means capable of executing a win/loss determination,
A gaming machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a symbol stop mode corresponding to the result of the win/fail judgment after performing variable display of symbols,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a decorative symbol stop mode corresponding to the result of the hit/miss determination after performing variable display of the decorative symbol,
Comprises a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating the transparent region with light,
At least a direction changing unit is provided in the plurality of regions in the transmission region,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the front side,
The size of the first region of the plurality of regions is a region larger than the size of the second region of the plurality of regions,
The image display means is capable of displaying a changing decorative pattern in a first display area which is a partial display area of the image display means,
At least a part of the first region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display region, and thus the transmissive region on the front side of at least part of the changing decorative pattern is emitted. Made it possible to
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. In the game table described in,
The image display means is capable of at least performing variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The transparent area has a third area,
The third region is a region where the direction changing means is not provided,
The image display means is capable of variably displaying at least one decorative design of the plurality of decorative designs in the first display area.
The image display means is capable of variably displaying at least one decorative design of the plurality of decorative designs in a second display area which is a partial display area of the image display means.
On the front side of the second display area, the first and second areas are not provided, and the third area is provided.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. In the game table described in,
At least a part of the second area is provided on the front side of at least a part of the area of the first display area, so that the transmissive area on the front side of at least part of the changing decorative pattern is emitted. Made it possible to
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
4.
2. In the game table described in,
In the game area, a rolling area in which a game ball can roll is provided,
The first region is not provided on the front side of the rolling region,
At least a part of the second region is provided on the front side of the rolling region,
At least a part of the third region is provided on the front side of the rolling region,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. Through 4. In the gaming table according to any one of the above,
Both the height and the width of the first region are larger than the diameter of the game ball,
At least one of the height and width of the second region is smaller than the diameter of the game ball,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 4>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board provided with at least a game area,
Production means capable of executing at least production related to games,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of the rendering means are provided,
At least one rendering means of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
At least one of the first rendering means and the second rendering means is provided with at least a transmissive region that is transparent to the back side,
The first effect means is provided at least in the game area,
The first effect means is at least movable to a first position and a second position,
When the first effect means is in the first position, the first effect means and the second effect means are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction in at least a part of the region,
The rendering means provided with the transparent area is located on the front side of the other rendering means,
A light emitting means capable of emitting at least light toward the transmission region;
The transmissive region is capable of directing light emitted from the light emitting means at least forward.
The transmissive region comprises at least a first transmissive region,
The transparent region includes at least a second transparent region,
The second transparent region is a region other than the first transparent region,
On the front side of at least part of the area of the production means located on the rear side, at least the first transmissive area can emit light.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, there are cases where a stereoscopic effect can be performed using the first effect means and the second effect means.

Further, the first effect means may be a shutter, the second effect means may be a liquid crystal display means, and the shutter comes out in front of the liquid crystal display means (the first effect means is When in the first position), the shutter may emit light in front of the liquid crystal display means.

Further, the first effect means may be a blade effect object, the second effect means may be an illumination member, and the illumination member may emit light in front of the blade effect object. Further, in this case, for example, the illumination member may have a half mirror, and the half mirror may be decorated while concealing the blade accessory, whereas the feather accessory may be displayed without being hidden. .. In this case, the case where the blade accessory is at the initial position corresponds to the first position.

Further, the first effect means may be various kinds of effects, and the second effect means may be a glass light emitting member, and when the effects are operated or in the initial position, the first effect means is first. Can be applied as the position (for example, even when the first effect means is in the second position, the first effect means and the second effect means may overlap in the front-rear direction). Glass emission may be performed by the glass light emitting member in the front to decorate.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light to at least the transmissive area when the first effect producing means is in the first position,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, when the first effect means and the second effect means overlap each other, the light emission effect can be surely performed.

The rendering means having the first transparent area may be the first rendering means or the second rendering means.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first rendering means is provided with at least the transparent region,
The light emitting means is provided in the first rendering means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
Even if the first rendering means does not overlap the second rendering means, it may be possible to execute the light-emitting rendering using the first transparent area.

Further, since the relative positional relationship between the first transmissive region and the light emitting means does not change, it may be possible to more reliably perform the light emission effect.

In this case, for example, the light emitting means and the first effecting means may be integrated, and as an example, the light emitting means may be provided at the edge of the shutter, or may be an illumination member. ..

The present invention also provides
4.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The light emitting means is provided separately from the first rendering means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the weight of the first rendering means can be reduced.

Further, even when the first effect means is not at the first position, it may be possible to effect using the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may not move with the movement of the first rendering means.

The light emitting means may be capable of performing at least a light emitting effect on the second effect means when the first effect means is at the second position.

In some cases, it is possible to perform a light emission effect on the second effect means.

In some cases, it is possible to perform the light emission effect only for the second effect means.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. Through 4. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The second rendering means is a liquid crystal display means,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of performing at least a game effect,
The first effect means is located in front of at least a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display means when it is in the first position,
The first rendering means makes at least the display area on the back side of the first rendering means visible by the transparent area,
The display area on the back side includes a plurality of display areas,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a first display area,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a second display area,
The first display region is a region located on the back side of the first transmissive region,
The second display region is a region located on the back side of the second transmissive region,
When the first transmissive region is made to emit light, the first display region is less visible than the second display region,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the production can be spoiled on the front side of the liquid crystal display means.

The present invention also provides
6.
5. The gaming machine described in,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least the first image,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when the first effect means is in the first position,
The first transmissive region has at least a pattern associated with the first image.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, when the light-emission effect is performed, the liquid crystal display and the first transmissive area can stereoscopically effect the display related to the first image.

The present invention also provides
7.
1. Through 6. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The first transmission region is provided with a plurality,
By causing the light-emitting means corresponding to the plurality of first transmissive regions to emit light, at least the first transmissive region can emit light.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the production can be varied.

The present invention also provides
8.
1. Through 7. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The first transmissive region is such that the transmissive region itself does not emit light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 5>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board provided with at least a game area,
Production means capable of executing at least production related to games,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of the rendering means are provided,
At least one of the rendering means is a first rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
At least one of the first rendering means and the second rendering means, at least a transparent region is provided,
The first effect means is provided at least in the game area,
The first effect means is at least movable to a first position and a second position,
When the first effect means is in the first position, the first effect means and the second effect means are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction in at least a part of the region,
The rendering means provided with the transparent area is located on the front side of the other rendering means,
An irradiation unit (for example, a light emitting unit 701) capable of irradiating at least light toward the transmission region is provided,
The light emitted to the transmission region by the irradiation means is capable of being guided to at least the front side,
The transmissive region comprises at least a first transmissive region,
The transparent region includes at least a second transparent region,
The second transparent region is a region other than the first transparent region,
On the front side of at least part of the area of the rendering means located on the rear side, the first transmissive area is capable of emitting at least light.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, there are cases where a stereoscopic effect can be performed using the first effect means and the second effect means.

Further, the first effect means may be a shutter, the second effect means may be a liquid crystal display means, and the shutter comes out in front of the liquid crystal display means (the first effect means is When in the first position), the shutter may emit light in front of the liquid crystal display means.

Further, the first effect means may be a blade effect object, the second effect means may be an illumination member, and the illumination member may emit light in front of the blade effect object. Further, in this case, for example, the illumination member may have a half mirror, and the half mirror may be decorated while concealing the blade accessory, whereas the feather accessory may be displayed without being hidden. .. In this case, the case where the blade accessory is at the initial position corresponds to the first position.

Further, the first effect means may be various kinds of effects, and the second effect means may be a glass light emitting member, and when the effects are operated or in the initial position, the first effect means is first. Can be applied as the position (for example, even when the first effect means is in the second position, the first effect means and the second effect means may overlap in the front-rear direction). Glass emission may be performed by the glass light emitting member in the front to decorate.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The irradiating means is capable of irradiating at least the transparent area when the first effecting means is in the first position,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, when the first effect means and the second effect means overlap each other, the light emission effect can be surely performed.

The rendering means having the first transparent area may be the first rendering means or the second rendering means.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first rendering means is provided with at least the transparent region,
The irradiation means is provided in the first rendering means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
Even if the first rendering means does not overlap the second rendering means, it may be possible to execute the light-emitting rendering using the first transparent area.

Further, since the relative positional relationship between the first transmissive region and the light emitting means does not change, it may be possible to more reliably perform the light emission effect.

In this case, for example, the light emitting means and the first effecting means may be integrated, and as an example, the light emitting means may be provided at the edge of the shutter, or may be an illumination member. ..

The present invention also provides
4.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The light emitting means is provided separately from the first rendering means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the weight of the first rendering means can be reduced.

Further, even when the first effect means is not at the first position, it may be possible to effect using the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may not move with the movement of the first rendering means.

The light emitting means may be capable of performing at least a light emitting effect on the second effect means when the first effect means is at the second position.

In some cases, it is possible to perform a light emission effect on the second effect means.

In some cases, it is possible to perform the light emission effect only for the second effect means.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. Through 4. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The second rendering means is a liquid crystal display means,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of performing at least a game effect,
The first effect means is located on the front side of at least a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display means when it is in the first position,
The first rendering means makes at least the display area on the rear side of the first rendering means visible by the transparent area,
The display area on the rear side of the first effect means is provided with a plurality of display areas,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a first display area,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a second display area,
The first display region is a region located on the rear side of the first transmissive region,
The second display region is a region located on the rear side of the second transmissive region,
When the first transmissive region is made to emit light, the first display region is less visible than the second display region,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the production can be spoiled on the front side of the liquid crystal display means.

The present invention also provides
6.
5. The gaming machine described in,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least the first image,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when the first effect means is in the first position,
The first transmissive region has at least a pattern associated with the first image.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, when the light-emission effect is performed, the liquid crystal display and the first transmissive area can stereoscopically effect the display related to the first image.

The present invention also provides
7.
1. Through 6. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The first transmission region is provided with a plurality,
By irradiating light by the irradiation means corresponding to the plurality of first transmission regions, it is possible to cause at least the first transmission region to emit light.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the production can be varied.

The present invention also provides
8.
1. Through 7. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The transmissive region is non-self-luminous,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
A.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The second rendering means is located in front of the first rendering means,
The second rendering means is provided with at least the transparent region,
The light emitting means is capable of causing at least a part of the first transmissive region to emit light when the first rendering means is in the second position.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to render the first rendering means and the second rendering means independently.

The present invention also provides
A'.
A. The gaming machine described in,
The second rendering means, when the first rendering means is in the first position, makes at least the first rendering means difficult to see.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
Since the presence of the first effect means can be diminished by the light emission effect of the first transparent region, it may be possible to give an impact when the first effect means moves.

The present invention also provides
B.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The second effect means is a transmissive member (for example, a glass member) capable of penetrating at least the game area,
When the first effect means is in the first position, the entire area overlaps with the second effect means,
The first rendering means, even when in the second position, the entire area overlaps with the second rendering means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to perform related effects regardless of the position of the first effect means.

The present invention also provides
C.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The rendering means provided with the transparent area is provided with a plurality of the first transparent areas that are at least separated in the front-rear direction,
The plurality of first transmissive regions have at least patterns associated with each other,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional effect only with the effect means having the first transparent area.

The present invention also provides
C'.
C. The gaming machine described in,
The production means provided with the transparent area is a transparent member (for example, a glass member) capable of at least penetrating the game area,
The transparent member is provided in a plurality in the front-back direction,
At least one transmission member of the plurality of transmission members is a first transmission member,
At least one transmission member of the plurality of transmission members is a second transmission member,
The first transmissive member is one in which the first transmissive region having a first pattern is formed,
The second transmissive member has the first transmissive region formed into a second pattern,
The first pattern and the second pattern are at least related patterns,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It may be possible to produce a three-dimensional pattern. For example, composite display may be possible.

The present invention also provides
D.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The production means provided with the transparent area is a transparent member (for example, a glass member) capable of at least penetrating the game area,
The game area is provided with a liquid crystal display means capable of at least performing effect display,
The first position is the front side of the display area of at least a part of the display area in the liquid crystal display means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to produce in three stages: liquid crystal display means, movable body, and glass emission.

(Other)
The present invention may have the following configurations.

When the pattern is formed by the first transparent area, the pattern may or may not be related to the other rendering means. It may be a related display that is combined with the rendering means (for example, a liquid crystal display).

-It is also possible to employ a rendering means having a plurality of first transparent areas in the front-rear direction. In this case, if the first transmissive regions overlap in the front-rear direction, it may be possible to emphasize the stereoscopic effect. Further, the first transmissive regions may not overlap in the front-back direction. In this case, it may be possible to produce a pattern with a sense of depth.

In the embodiment, the light is changed as much as possible toward the front side which is the player side, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a direction changing means (cut or the like) is provided so as to reduce the amount of light directed forward, the pattern that becomes the first transmissive region in that portion may be displayed thinly. In other words, there are cases where it is possible to change the effect depending on the shade of the color or the like (for example, it is possible to make it look stereoscopic without the first transparent region in the front-rear direction).

Further, for example, the amount of light emitted by the light emitting means (which may also be referred to as the irradiation means) can be adjusted, and the portion desired to be shown to the player may be reduced in light quantity so that the pattern may be thinned. is there. For example, if the amount of light is increased on the front side of the fourth pattern or the look-ahead hold display to make the pattern darker, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the contrary. In some cases, it may be possible to perform an effect without impairing the visibility.

The shade of the pattern can be appropriately set by a combination of the cut size, direction, density (fineness), distance from the light emitting means (light source), and the like.

The first transparent area may be any one of a picture, a character, a symbol, a photograph, a pattern, and the like.

It is also possible for each light emitting means to define the first transmissive area which is the area in charge of raising the pattern. For example, the first transmissive region that exists between one light emitting means and another light emitting means forms a cut in a direction in which light from both light emitting means can be changed toward the front side. Good. Further, the position of the light emitting means may be set at a position other than the side surface side according to the cutting direction.

The first transmissive region may be provided so that a plurality of patterns appear in the common region. A first pattern of the plurality of patterns corresponds to light emission from the first direction, and a second pattern of the plurality of patterns corresponds to light emission from the second direction and has different cutting directions. By doing so, the pattern may be displayed individually.

As for the shutter, which is a production movable body that covers the liquid crystal display means, it is not necessary to cover all of the liquid crystal display means, or the entire display area of the liquid crystal display means may be covered, and a part of the outer side may be covered. Good. In the latter case, the effect may be able to be performed in a range larger than the display area.

The first transparent area can be used for rendering even when the first rendering means is not at the first position.

With the rendering means having a plurality of first transparent regions in the front-rear direction, related patterns may be rendered, or different renderings may be performed by shifting the timing. Even if the timing is shifted, the related effect may be performed (for example, a step-up notice is an example of the related effect).

-Display devices controlled by main control means such as special symbol display devices and general-purpose display devices are outside the game area (visible by the transparent member, and glass emission does not occur or glass emission does not occur). Can be placed in a region where the effect is weak).

-The effect means provided with the first transparent area may be located rearward of the other effect means. For example, if another movable body moves in front of the shutter (the shutter emits light), the operation of the movable body may be more prominent.

-Both the first effect means and the second effect means may have the first transmissive area and be capable of executing the light emission effect.

-In the above-mentioned embodiment, although the 1st penetration field was constituted by cutting, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a photographic film, a printed matter, an image, or the like is attached to a glass surface and light is emitted there to form a pattern. Also,
A configuration may be employed in which light-scattering particles or bubbles that reflect irradiated light are provided inside a transmissive member such as glass or transparent resin, and thereby light is reflected and light is emitted to form a pattern.

Further, in this case, if the glass or the transparent resin contains a light diffusing agent, it may be possible to further enhance the light emission effect. The adoption of the transparent member containing the light diffusing agent can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments. Furthermore, it is also possible to apply it to a transparent game board and emit light from the rear.

-Even if a transparent game board is used and light is emitted from the rear side, it can be used because the pattern forming the first transmissive area appears.

In the embodiment, the light emitting means has a configuration capable of emitting light laterally to the first transmissive region, but may have a configuration capable of emitting light from directly behind. For example, a transparent game board may be provided with a first transparent region so that the pattern can be made to stand out from the rear.

<Appendix 6>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200) provided with at least a game area (for example, a game area 124),
Display means capable of performing at least display (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A transmissive means (for example, a transmissive member 703) provided at a position facing at least the display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
An irradiating unit (for example, a light source 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H) capable of irradiating at least light to the transmitting unit is provided,
The transmitting means is provided with at least a light emitting means (for example, lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, 703de, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a decorative design, a hold display, an effect display),
The light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting at least light when the first condition is satisfied,
The light emitting means does not emit at least when the second condition is satisfied,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
A variety of effects can be performed.

In addition, it may be possible to perform various effects.

Further, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display by making the display less visible to the player.

The display means may be a decorative pattern display device (liquid crystal, reel, 7-segment, etc.), image display device (liquid crystal, etc.), or the like.

The light emitting means may be a dela glass, a concave portion formed by lens cutting, a convex portion formed by printing, or the like.

The first display is a decorative pattern, a hold display, an effect display (an effect display that indicates the reliability of the change, a look-ahead effect display that indicates the reliability of the change after the next time, a reliability (the change or the next time In some cases, it may be a presentation display that does not indicate the reliability of fluctuation).

The light emitting means may be one that guides at least the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side by reflection, or one that at least guides the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side by refraction.

The transmitting means may be provided on the front side of the game board.

If the second condition is satisfied while the first condition is satisfied, the second condition may be prioritized.

If the second condition is satisfied while the first condition is satisfied, the first condition may be prioritized.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means emits non-self-luminous light.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, a variety of effects can be performed.

Further, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display by making the display less visible to the player.

It should be noted that "the non-self-luminous light emission by the light emitting means" may mean that the light emitting means itself does not emit light. In addition, “the non-self-luminous light emission by the light emitting means” may mean that the light emitting means is not provided with the irradiation means.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting at least light when irradiated by the irradiation means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, a variety of effects can be performed.

Further, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display by making the display less visible to the player.

Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. In the gaming table according to any one of the above,
The light emitting means includes at least a first light emitting means (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb, 703v).
The light emitting means includes at least a second light emitting means (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb, 703u),
The first light emitting means is different from the second light emitting means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, more diverse effects can be performed.

The first light emitting means may be displayed in the first mode.

The second light emitting means may be displayed in the second mode.

Note that the first aspect may differ from the second aspect.

Further, the first aspect may be the same as the second aspect.

Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. In the gaming table according to any one of the above,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a second display,
The light emitting means is at least not provided on the front side of the second display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
By making the second display clear, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the display.

In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by keeping the information important to the player always visible.

The second display may be a fourth symbol, a hold (such as one provided around the image display device or a hold of the special image display device), a pattern of the special image display means, a decorative pattern, an effect display, etc. ..

The present invention also provides
A.
A game board provided with a game area,
Display means provided on the game board and capable of executing at least a plurality of displays,
Transmission means provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
An irradiation unit capable of irradiating at least light to the transmission unit is provided,
The transmitting means is provided with at least a light emitting means,
The light emitting means is for guiding at least the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The plurality of displays includes the first display,
The first light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display,
The light emitting means emits light when the first condition is satisfied,
The light emitting means does not emit light when the second condition is satisfied,
The light emitting means emits light when the second condition is satisfied and the third condition is satisfied.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display by making the display less visible to the player.

The present invention also provides
B.
1. In the game table described in,
The irradiation means includes a first irradiation means,
The irradiation means includes a second irradiation means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means,
The light emitting means includes a second light emitting means,
The first light emitting means emits light by irradiation by the first irradiation means (for example, an LED that is a light source arranged in a vertical direction when viewed from a player),
The second light emitting means does not emit light by irradiation by the first irradiation means,
The second light emitting means emits light by irradiation by the second irradiation means (for example, an LED that is a light source arranged in the left-right direction when viewed from the player),
The first light emitting means is one that does not emit light by irradiation by the second irradiation means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It may be possible to increase the variation of production.

The first light emitting means may be capable of emitting light by irradiation by the second irradiation means.

The second light emitting means may be capable of emitting light by irradiation by the first irradiation means.

The present invention also provides
C.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means,
The light emitting means includes a second light emitting means,
At least one light emitting means of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
By providing a case where it is difficult for the player to see the display, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display.

Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display.

The other light emitting means of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may not be provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display.

Note that one and the other of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be reversed.

The present invention also provides
D.
4. In the game table described in,
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means) is not provided on the front side of the area through which the game ball passes (for example, the game area),
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game.

As the area where the game ball passes, around the launch rail, around the nail where the game ball hits first, starting opening (first special drawing starting opening, second special drawing starting opening, general drawing starting opening (gate and through chucker) ), windmill (ball hitting change member), etc.

It should be noted that not all of the light emitting means may be provided on the front side of the area through which the game ball passes.

The light emitting means may be provided in front of the area through which the game ball can pass, in which case the width of the light emitting area may be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the width of the light emitting area is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. May be shorter. It may also be longer than the diameter of the game ball.

The present invention also provides
D1.
4. In the game table described in,
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means) is not provided on the front side of the area through which the game ball passes (for example, the game area),
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game.

The present invention also provides
D2.
4. In the game table described in,
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means) is not provided on the front side of the area where the game ball passes (for example, the game area),
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game.

The present invention also provides
D3.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is not provided in front of an area (eg, a game area) through which a game ball passes.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game.

The present invention also provides
D4.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is not provided at least in part in front of a region (eg, a game region) through which a game ball passes. Assumed,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game.

The present invention also provides
D5.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is not provided at least in part in front of a region (eg, a game region) through which a game ball passes. And
At least one of the other light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is provided all in front of a region (for example, a game region) through which a game ball passes,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game ball may be made visible to prevent it from affecting the game.

The present invention also provides
E.
4. In the game table described in,
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means) is provided in front of a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, a region other than the game region, or a region in the game region where the game ball cannot pass). Assumed,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (such as liquid crystal and movable objects).

The area where the game ball cannot pass may be an area where the game ball cannot pass. The area where the game sphere does not pass may be, for example, around the liquid crystal (liquid crystal or a movable object arranged around the liquid crystal).

In addition, you may make it provide all the 1st light emission means in the front side of the area|region where a game ball does not pass.

It should be noted that at least a part of the first light emitting means may not be provided on the front side of the region where the game ball does not pass.

In addition, you may make it not provide all the 1st light emission means in the front side of the area|region where a game ball does not pass.

The present invention also provides
E1.
4. In the game table described in,
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means) is provided in front of a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, a region other than the game region or a region in the game region where the game ball cannot pass). Assumed,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (such as liquid crystal and movable objects).

The present invention also provides
E2.
4. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means) is provided in front of a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, a region other than the game region or a region in the game region where the game ball cannot pass). ), at least a part of
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (such as liquid crystal and movable objects).

The present invention also provides
E3.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and the plurality of light emitting elements are provided in front of a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, a region other than the game region or a region in the game region where the game ball cannot pass). At least part of the means shall be provided,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (such as liquid crystal and movable objects).

The present invention also provides
E4.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, other than the game region, or within the game region, a game ball). , At least a part of which is to be provided in front of
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (such as liquid crystal and movable objects).

The present invention also provides
E5.
1. In the game table described in,
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, other than the game region, or within the game region, a game ball). At the front side of the area (where
At least one of the other light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is entirely in front of a region where the game ball does not pass (for example, a region other than the game region or a region in the game region where the game ball cannot pass). Not provided,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the area where the game ball does not pass (such as liquid crystal and movable objects).

The present invention also provides
F.
1. In the game table described in,
If it is a specific area even if the game ball does not pass, the light emitting means is not provided on the front side of at least a part of the specific area,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The game state (for example, symbol change? Stopped? Is hold stored? High probability? Big hit? Right hitting period?) Can be prevented from affecting.

The specific area may be an area where a special figure display device, a universal figure display device, a holding lamp, etc. are arranged, a fourth symbol, or the like.

The light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the special figure display device.

The light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the universal figure display device.

The light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the holding lamp (main).

The light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the fourth symbol.

The light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the specific area.

It should be noted that although a certain light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means described in 4.) is not provided, another light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means described in 4.) is provided in the specific area. It may be provided on a part of the front side.

<Other>
(1) Example of the second condition (i) It is possible to perform at least light emission by the light emitting means (for example, light emission display of a pattern applied to the transparent portion, glass light emission) while the design is changing, but the glass light emitting means while the design is stopped. There is a case where at least light emission is not performed. This symbol may be a symbol of the special symbol display means. It should be noted that at least light emission by the light emitting means can be executed while the symbol is stopped, but at least light emission by the glass light emitting means may not be performed while the symbol is changing.

(Ii) Light emission by the light emitting means can be performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during the decorative symbol stop display. The decorative symbol display means may be different from the image display means (for example, reel or segment display). Although the light emission by the light emitting means can be performed during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(Iii) Light emission by the light emitting means can be executed during the prefetching effect, but in other cases, the light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed. It should be noted that during the prefetching effect, the light emitting means does not emit light, but in other cases, the light emitting means may be capable of executing light emission.

(Iv) Light emission by the light emitting means can be executed in one game state, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be executed in another game state.
For example, when the special figure is highly accurate, the light emitting means can emit light, but when the special figure is not highly accurate, the light emitting means may not emit light. It should be noted that light emission by the light emitting means can be performed when the accuracy of the special figure is low, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed when the accuracy of the special figure is high.
・In addition, as examples of other game states, high accuracy (during special support)/low accuracy (during non-electric power support), probability of latent change (high accuracy, low accuracy), small hit (special map) Low accuracy normal figure low accuracy), during big hit/normal game (when not in big hit), probable change (probable change condition after end of big hit with payout)/ sudden change (probable change condition after end of big hit without payout), In each of these combinations, one may be capable of emitting light by the light emitting means and the other may not be emitted by the light emitting means. In game states other than these examples, one may be capable of emitting light by the light emitting means, and the other may not be emitted by the light emitting means.

(V) Light emission by the light emitting means can be performed during the demonstration effect (hereinafter, demonstration effect), but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed in other cases. It should be noted that during the demonstration production, the light emitting means does not emit light, but in other cases, the light emitting means may be able to execute light emission. Further, after the symbol is stopped (or immediately after), the light emitting means may not emit light until the demonstration effect is started, and other than that, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light. In addition, after the symbol is stopped (or immediately after), the light emission by the light emitting means can be executed until the demonstration effect is started, and other than that, the light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed.
In addition, with demonstration production,
It is an effect that is executed when the next symbol variation display does not start by the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the symbol variation display ends. For example, one that simply performs a simulated variation of the symbol variation display, one that displays the title of the game console, an effect that displays a predetermined character or the like to explain the characteristics of the game console, a lamp effect that accompanies these effects, and a voice. The production is applicable. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a demo flag, and when the demo flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the second sub-control unit 500 to display the decorative symbol display device. Instruct 208 to display the demonstration effect. A demo screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Note that the demonstration effect ends with a predetermined trigger. For example, the process ends when there is a new prize at the special map starting port. With the end of the demonstration effect, the demonstration flag is set to off.

(Vi) Light emission by the light emitting means can be executed while the production movable means is stopped, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during operation of the production movable means.
The effect movable means may be an image display means.
-The effect movable means may be a decorative symbol display means.
-In some cases, the light emitting means does not emit light while the production moving means is stopped, but it may be possible to emit light by the light emitting means during operation of the production moving means. Further, there are cases where the light emitting means may emit light during the stop and operation of the production movable means, and the light emission means may not emit light during the stop and operation of the production moving means.

(Vii) It may be possible that the light emitting means does not emit light while the hold display is moving, and in other cases, the light emitting means can emit light.
・The hold display is increased/decreased or moved when the symbol starts changing. At that time, the light emitting means may not emit light.
The light emission by the light emitting means can be executed during the movement of the hold display, and the light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed at other times.

(Viii) Light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during the user setting screen.
-During the user setting screen (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc.), the light emitting means may not emit light.
-During the user setting screen (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc.), the irradiation means may not irradiate the transmission means with light.

(2) Display surrounded by the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means in 4.) (i) The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the decorative pattern.
-In the above-mentioned embodiment, three decorative patterns are displayed, and the light emitting means may surround at least a part of one or more decorative patterns.
-It should be noted that the light-emitting means may surround at least a part of one decorative design or all of the one decorative design.
It is to be noted that only a part of a plurality of (two or three in the above-described embodiments) decorative designs or a plurality of (two or three in the above-described embodiments) decorative designs are all light emitting means. May be enclosed at least.
In addition, part or all of the display other than the decorative pattern may be enclosed together with part or all of the decorative pattern.
-When the light emitting means surrounds the decorative symbol display, other displays may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.

(Ii) The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the hold display (for example, an icon).
In the above-described embodiment, at least a part of the hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means as one of the prefetching effects.
-In addition, you may enclose the hold display as an effect of the said variation.
In the above-described embodiment, the maximum four hold displays are displayed, and the light emitting means may surround at least a part of at least one hold display.
The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the one hold display or all of the one hold display.
-Note that only a part of a plurality (two, three or four in the above embodiment) of the hold display, or a plurality (two, three or four in the above embodiment) of the hold display The entire display may be surrounded by at least the light emitting means.
-Part or all of the display other than the hold display may be enclosed together with part or all of the hold display.
-When the light emitting means surrounds the hold display, the other display may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.
When one hold is enclosed, the reliability of the hold display enclosed by the light emitting means may be suggested, and the reliability of the hold displays other than the enclosed hold may be suggested. (For example, although the second hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means, it actually indicates the reliability of the third hold...).
-If multiple holds are enclosed, it may indicate the reliability of the hold display enclosed by the light-emitting means, or it may indicate the reliability of hold displays other than the enclosed hold. May be present (for example, the second and third holds are enclosed, but in fact suggests the reliability of the first hold...).

(Iii) The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the effect display.
The light emitting means may surround at least a part of at least one effect display among a plurality of effect displays.
The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the one effect display or the entire one effect display.
The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the plurality of effect displays or all of the plurality of effect displays.
In addition, part or all of the display other than the effect display may be enclosed together with part or all of the effect display.
-When the light emitting means surrounds the effect display, other displays may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.
-All three effect displays of effect/prefetch effect/effect that does not show reliability may be surrounded by the light emitting means.
-At least one or two of the three effects, that is, the effect of the change, the look-ahead effect, and the effect that does not show the reliability, may be surrounded by the light emitting means.
It is not necessary to enclose only the effect of the variation among the three effects of the variation/prefetching effect/effect that does not show the reliability with the light emitting means, and to enclose the other effects with the light emitting means.
It is not necessary to enclose only the pre-reading effect among the three effects, that is, the effect/pre-reading effect/the effect that does not show the reliability, with the light emitting means and the other effects with the light emitting means.
It is not necessary to enclose only the effect not showing the reliability among the three effects of the fluctuation/prefetching effect/effect not showing the reliability with the light emitting means and the other effects with the light emitting means.
-When the light emitting means surrounds the effect display, other displays may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.

(3) Display hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means in 4.) (i) The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the decorative pattern.
In the above embodiment, three decorative patterns are displayed, and the light emitting means may hide at least a part of at least one decorative pattern.
The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the one decorative pattern or all of the one decorative pattern.
It is to be noted that only a part of a plurality of (two or three in the above-described embodiments) decorative designs or a plurality of (two or three in the above-described embodiments) decorative designs are all light emitting means. May at least hide.
・Part or all of the display other than the decorative pattern may be hidden together with part or all of the decorative pattern.
-When the light emitting means hides the decorative symbol display, other displays may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
-Part of the decorative pattern is surrounded by the light emitting means, part is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, part of the first decorative pattern is surrounded by the light emitting means, part of the second decorative pattern is It may be hidden by the light emitting means).
・All of one display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and part of another display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the entire first decorative pattern is surrounded, and part of the second decorative pattern is illuminated) May be hidden by means).

(Ii) The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the hold display (for example, an icon).
In the above-described embodiment, at least a part of the hold display is hidden by the light emitting means as one of the prefetch effects.
-Note that the hold display may be hidden as an effect of the variation.
In the above-described embodiment, the maximum four hold displays are displayed, and the light emitting means may hide at least a part of at least one hold display.
The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the one hold display or all of the one hold display.
-Note that only a part of a plurality (two, three, or four in the above embodiment) of the hold display, or a plurality (two, three, or four in the above embodiment) of the hold display The entire display may be at least hidden by the light emitting means.
-A part or all of the display other than the hold display may be hidden together with a part or all of the hold display.
When the light emitting means hides the hold display, the other display may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
When one hold is hidden, the reliability of the hold display hidden by the light emitting means may be suggested, and the reliability of the hold display other than the hidden hold may be suggested. (For example, although the second hold display is hidden by the light emitting means, it actually indicates the reliability of the third hold...).
-If multiple holds are hidden, it may indicate the reliability of the hold display hidden by the light emitting means, or the reliability of the hold display other than the hidden hold may be suggested. May be present (for example, the second and third holds are hidden, but in fact suggests the reliability of the first hold...).
A part of the hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the hold display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, a part of the first hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the second hold display is It may be hidden by the light emitting means).
・All of one display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and part of another display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the entire first hold display is surrounded, and part of the second hold display is lighted) May be hidden by means).

(Iii) The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the effect display.
The light emitting means may hide a part of at least one effect display among the plurality of effect displays.
The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the one effect display or the entire one effect display.
The light emitting means may hide at least part of the plurality of effect displays, or all of the plurality of effect displays.
In addition, part or all of the display other than the effect display may be hidden together with part or all of the effect display.
When the light emitting means hides the effect display, other displays may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
-All three effect displays of the effect of the change, the look-ahead effect, and the effect not showing the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means.
-At least one or two effect displays of the effect/prefetch effect/effect that does not show the degree of reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means.
Only the effect of the change among the three effects of the effect/prefetch effect/effect that does not show the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
Only the pre-reading effect among the three effects of the effect/pre-reading effect/effect that does not show the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
Of the three effects, that is, the effect of the change, the look-ahead effect, and the effect that does not show the reliability, only the effect that does not show the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
When the light emitting means hides the effect display, other displays may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
A part of the effect display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the effect display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, a part of the first effect display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the second effect display is It may be hidden by the light emitting means).
・A certain display is entirely surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of another display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the entire first effect display is surrounded, and part of the second effect display is lighted). May be hidden by means).

(4) Second light emitting means (i) Shapes of first light emitting means and second light emitting means-The shapes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be the same or different.

(Ii) Sizes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means The sizes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be the same or different. The first light emitting means may be larger than the second light emitting means, and the first light emitting means may be smaller than the second light emitting means.

(Iii) Timing of Light Emission in First Light Emitting Means and Second Light Emitting Means The light emitting timing of the first light emitting means and the light emitting timing of the second light emitting means may be the same or different. The light emission timing of the first light emitting means may be earlier than the light emission timing of the second light emitting means, and the light emission timing of the first light emitting means may be later than the light emission timing of the second light emitting means.

(Iv) Regarding the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means: The first light emitting means is capable of at least emitting light by the light from the first irradiation means (for example, an LED that emits light from the vertical direction), and the second light emission means. The light emitting means is at least capable of emitting light by light from the second irradiation means (for example, an LED that emits light from the left and right directions).
-While the first light emitting means emits light, the second light emitting means may not emit light.
-The second light emitting means may emit light while the first light emitting means emits light.
The same applies when the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are reversed.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may emit light at the same time.

(V) Colors of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means The colors of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be the same or different.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the same shape but different colors.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the same shape and the same color.
The shapes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be different and the colors may be the same.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have different shapes and different colors.

(5) Second display (i) The second display may be provided at a position that is not hidden by at least the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means in 4.).
-The second display may be provided at a position where it is not hidden only by the light emitting means.

(Ii) In the case of a plurality of light emitting areas: The second display is provided at a position not at least hidden by the light emitting means of at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not at least hidden by only one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means.
The second display may be provided at a position not hidden by the light emitting means of both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means.
In addition, it may be provided at a position not hidden by the other light emitting means, or may be provided at a hidden position.
The second display may be provided at a position surrounded by at least one light emitting means, or may be provided at a position not surrounded by one light emitting means.
The second display may be provided at a position surrounded by at least the other light emitting means, or may be provided at a position not surrounded by the other light emitting means.

(Iii) Regarding the plurality of light emitting means (three or more light emitting means): The second display is provided at a position not at least hidden by the plurality of light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not hidden by at least one of the plurality of light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not hidden by at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not hidden by all the light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means.
The second display may be provided at a position hidden by the light emitting means other than at least one light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means, or may be provided at a position not hidden.
The second display may or may not be provided at a position hidden by at least one light emitting means (a light emitting means other than the hidden light emitting means) of the plurality of light emitting means. You don't have to.

The second display may be provided at a position surrounded by at least one light emitting means (a light emitting means other than the hidden light emitting means) of the plurality of light emitting means. You don't have to.

(6) Third condition (i) When the second condition is satisfied, if the third condition is satisfied, light emission by the light emitting means can be executed. Even under the condition that the light emitting means does not emit light, the light emitting means may be able to perform light emission.
-For example, when the design (decorative design) is stopped ((1)(i) or (1)(ii)), light is not normally emitted by the light emitting means, but the design is stopped during the pre-reading effect (or In some cases, light emission by the light emitting means can be executed even during the stop display).
-When the second condition is satisfied, the light emitting means may not emit light even when the third condition is satisfied.

(Ii) When the third condition is satisfied while the second condition is not satisfied, the light emitting means can emit light.
The light emission means may not emit light when the third condition is satisfied while the second condition is not satisfied.

(7) Light emission by the light emitting means as an effect (i) Light emission by the light emitting means as an effect of the variation ・Even if the light emission by the light emitting means is started after (or immediately after) the change starts. Good.
The light emitted by the light emitting means may be turned off after (or immediately after, or simultaneously with) the fluctuation.
The light emission by the light emitting means may be continued even after the fluctuation is finished.
The light emission by the light emitting means may be extinguished after (or immediately after, or simultaneously with) the start of the next change.

(Ii) Light emission by the light emitting means as the prefetching effect during the normal game. The light emission by the light emitting means may be continued until the variation of the prefetched holding is started. Further, the light emission by the light emitting means may be continued until the pre-reading change of the hold is completed.
The light emission by the light emitting means may be executed every time a symbol stop display (special drawing or decorative design) is started until the variation of the pre-reading hold starts (for example, light emission by the light emitting means is performed when the symbol is stopped). ..
-Emitting by the light emitting means may be executed every time the pattern variation display (special drawing or decorative design) is started until the change of the pre-reading hold starts (for example, by the light emitting means at the start of the variation of the symbol) It emits light).
The light emission by the light emitting means may be executed during the pattern change until the pre-reading change of the hold starts (the timing at which the light emitting means executes the light emission is arbitrary as long as the pattern is being changed).
The light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed until the change of the pre-read hold is started.

(Iii) When light is emitted from the light emitting means as a look-ahead effect during the big hit, from when light emission from the light emitting means is started in a specific round to when the specific round is finished During this period, the light emitting means may continue to emit light, and the light emitting means may continue to emit light until the big hit ends, and the start (or end, or a specific timing during the change) of the pending hold is changed. The light emission by the light emitting means may be continued until (or immediately after) or simultaneously.
The light emitting means may not emit light during the pre-reading effect during the big hit, and the light emitting means may emit light at other timings.
The light emission means may not emit light at the start or the end of the big hit, and the light emission means may emit light.
During the big hit, the light emitting means may emit light at a position that does not hide (or not surround) a specific area (for example, an attacker), or may emit light at any position. ..

(Iv) Light emission by the light emitting means as an effect that does not suggest reliability. Demonstration by the light emitting means as a demonstration effect (display of game console title (eg, CR Yoshimune), manufacturer name, display of characters, patterns, etc.) You may go.
-Light may be emitted by the light emitting means as a decoration while the design is changing or stopped.
・Light may be emitted by the light emitting means as a decoration during a big hit.

(V) The color and shape of the light emitted by the light emitting means, the size of the region, and the color of the light emitted by the light emitting means may indicate the reliability of the variation and the variation from the next time.
・The color of the light emitted by the light emitting means notifies the number of big hits, the number of balls, the game state (for example, electric power support/non-electric power support, probability change/non-probability change), error status, and status of fraud detection. May be.
The shape of the light emitted by the light emitting means may indicate the reliability of the variation or the variation from the next time.
・The number of big hits, the number of balls, the gaming state (for example, electric support/non-electric support, positive/non-positive change), error state, and fraud detected state are notified according to the shape of the light emitted by the light emitting means. May be.
The reliability of the variation and the variation from the next time onward may be suggested depending on the size of the region of light emission by the light emitting means.
・Depending on the size of the area of light emission by the light emitting means, the number of big hits, the number of balls paid out, the game state (for example, electric support/non-electric support, positive change/non-predictable change), error status, and status of fraud detected are notified. It may be one.

(Vi) Light emission period of light emission by the light emitting means-From a specific timing after power is turned on (for example, after completion of initial operation of the movable body) to power failure (power failure such as power failure or power off) Alternatively, the light emitting means may continuously emit light. In addition, it does not need to be continuously performed.

(8) Other Matters-In the above-mentioned embodiment, the image display means is the decorative symbol display means, but the image display means and the decorative symbol display means may be different.
In the above-described embodiment, the image display means includes the hold display area, but a hold display means (for example, hold display by LED) may be provided separately from the image display means.
-A plurality of (two or more) image display means may be provided. In that case, each of the decorative design (special figure 1, special figure 2), special figure 1 reservation display, special figure 2 reservation display and 4th design, 1st picture display expedient or 2nd picture display expedient one or It may be provided on both sides or may not be provided on both sides.
The image display means may be movable (for example, movable) as a movable body. When a plurality of image display means are provided, at least one is movable (for example, movable) as a movable body and at least one is not movable (for example, movable) as a movable body (for example, Fixed), all of the plurality of image display means can operate as movable bodies (for example, movable), and all of the plurality of image display means can operate as movable bodies It may not be (for example, movable).

<Appendix 7>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board provided with at least a game area,
Production means capable of executing at least production related to games,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of the rendering means are provided,
At least one rendering means of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first effect means is a display means capable of at least executing a display related to the effect,
The display means is capable of performing at least the first display,
The display means is capable of at least executing the second display,
The first display is a display that is at least related to the second display,
The second effect means is located in front of the first effect means,
The second rendering means is provided with at least a transmissive area that can permeate the rear surface side,
A light emitting means capable of emitting at least light toward the transmission region;
The transmissive region is capable of directing light emitted from the light emitting means at least forward.
The transmissive region comprises at least a first transmissive region,
The transparent region includes at least a second transparent region,
The second transparent region is a region other than the first transparent region,
The second effect means is capable of at least executing light emission effect in front of the display means by causing the first transmissive region to emit light.
The first transmissive region is located on the front side of at least a part of one of the first display and the second display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even if one of the displays becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the other display may allow the player to recognize the display.

In addition, there are cases where one of the displays can be made conspicuous by the light emission effect. In some cases, the overlapping of the light emission effects may be more prominent, and in other cases, the other display may be more prominent.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
At least a display period capable of displaying both the first display and the second display is provided,
The second effect means is capable of performing at least the light emission effect on the front side of at least a part of one of the first display and the second display during the display period.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even if one of the displays becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the other display may allow the player to recognize the display.

In addition, there are cases where one of the displays can be made conspicuous by the light emission effect. In some cases, the overlapping of the light emission effects may be more prominent, and in other cases, the other display may be more prominent.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first display is a display according to first information at least related to the game,
The second display is a display according to the first information,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the information can be surely notified even when the light emitting effect is performed by displaying the same information in a plurality of displays.

The present invention also provides
4.
3. The gaming machine described in,
Equipped with at least a determination means capable of executing at least determination,
The first display is a first symbol display corresponding at least to the result of the hit determination,
The second display is a second symbol display at least corresponding to the result of the hit determination,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
Since one of the symbols is not hidden by the light emission effect, there are cases where the player can be surely notified of the information he/she wants to know.

In addition, it may be possible to decorate the pattern by the light emitting effect to make it stand out.

The present invention also provides
5.
3. The gaming machine described in,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display,
The display means is capable of performing at least a first hold display capable of notifying at least the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The display means is capable of at least executing a second hold display capable of at least informing the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The first display is the first hold display,
The second display is the second hold display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
On the other hand, the hold display may be able to reliably inform the number of holds.

The present invention also provides
6.
5. The gaming machine described in,
The first hold display is a hold icon,
The second hold display is a display including at least character information,
The display means is capable of performing at least the first hold display by displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variable display is held,
The display means can execute at least the second hold display for notifying the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held by the character information.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The second hold display, which is not hidden by the first transparent area, may simply inform the player of the hold number.

In addition, the hold icon may be able to attract more attention depending on the light emission effect.

The present invention also provides
7.
6. The gaming machine described in,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of the hold icons,
At least one type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The display means is capable of at least changing the displayed first hold icon to the second hold icon, at least in association with the emission effect being performed.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the light-emission effect can be associated with the change in the advance notice made on the display means (in some cases, it can function as the advance notice itself).

The present invention also provides
8.
1. Through 7. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The first transmissive region is such that the transmissive region itself does not emit light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 8>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board provided with at least a game area,
Production means capable of executing at least production related to games,
A gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of the rendering means are provided,
At least one of the rendering means is a first rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first effect means is a display means capable of at least executing a display related to the effect,
The display means is capable of performing at least the first display,
The display means is capable of at least executing the second display,
The first display is a display that is at least related to the second display,
The second effect means is located in front of the first effect means,
The second effect means, at least a transparent area is provided,
An irradiation unit (for example, a light emitting unit 701) capable of irradiating at least light toward the transmission region,
The light emitted to the transmission region by the irradiation means is capable of being guided to at least the front side,
The transmissive region comprises at least a first transmissive region,
The transparent region includes at least a second transparent region,
The second transparent region is a region other than the first transparent region,
The second effect means, by causing the first transmissive region to emit light, at least light emission effect can be performed on the front side of the display means,
The first transmissive region is located on the front side of at least a part of one of the first display and the second display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even if one of the displays becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the other display may allow the player to recognize the display.

In addition, there are cases where one of the displays can be made conspicuous by the light emission effect. In some cases, the overlapping of the light emission effects may be more prominent, and in other cases, the other display may be more prominent.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
At least a display period capable of displaying both the first display and the second display is provided,
The second rendering means (the first transmissive area) produces the light emission rendering on the front side of at least a part of one of the first display and the second display during the display period. At least something that is feasible,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It is possible to provide a gaming table that can perform a variety of effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even if one of the displays becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the other display may allow the player to recognize the display.

In addition, there are cases where one of the displays can be made conspicuous by the light emission effect. In some cases, the overlapping of the light emission effects may be more prominent, and in other cases, the other display may be more prominent.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first display is a display according to first information at least related to the game,
The second display is a display according to the first information,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the information can be surely notified even when the light emitting effect is performed by displaying the same information in a plurality of displays.

The present invention also provides
4.
3. The gaming machine described in,
Equipped with at least a determination means capable of executing at least determination,
The first display is a first symbol display corresponding at least to the result of the hit determination,
The second display is a second symbol display at least corresponding to the result of the hit determination,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
Since one of the symbols is not hidden by the light emission effect, there are cases where the player can be surely notified of the information he/she wants to know.

In addition, it may be possible to decorate the pattern by the light emitting effect to make it stand out.

The present invention also provides
5.
3. The gaming machine described in,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display,
The display means is capable of performing at least a first hold display capable of notifying at least the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The display means is capable of at least executing a second hold display capable of at least informing the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The first display is the first hold display,
The second display is the second hold display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
On the other hand, the hold display may be able to reliably inform the number of holds.

The present invention also provides
6.
5. The gaming machine described in,
The first hold display is a hold icon,
The second hold display is a display including at least character information,
The display means is capable of at least executing the first hold display by displaying the hold icon in a number corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variable display is held,
According to the character information, the display means can execute at least the second hold display for notifying the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The second hold display, which is not hidden by the first transparent area, may simply inform the player of the hold number.

In addition, the hold icon may be able to attract more attention depending on the light emission effect.

The present invention also provides
7.
6. The gaming machine described in,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of the hold icons,
At least one type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The display means is such that at least the first hold icon being displayed is at least changeable to the second hold icon in association with the light emission effect being performed.
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the light-emission effect can be associated with the change in the advance notice made on the display means (in some cases, it can function as the advance notice itself).

The present invention also provides
8.
1. Through 7. The gaming table according to any one of the above,
The transmissive region is non-self-luminous,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
A.
4. The gaming machine described in,
The display means is capable of performing at least variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means is capable of performing at least variable display of the fourth symbol, and the first symbol display is the decorative symbol,
The second symbol display is the fourth symbol,
The first transparent area is capable of performing at least the light emission effect in front of at least a part of the decorative pattern,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, it is possible to reliably notify the result of the hit/miss determination with the fourth symbol.

The decorative variable display and the fourth variable display may start at the same time and may stop at the same time. The variable display of the decorative symbol may start and stop earlier than the variable display of the fourth symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol may start earlier than the variable display of the fourth symbol and stop later. The variable display of the decorative symbol may start after the variable display of the fourth symbol and stop first. The variable display of the decorative symbol may start later than the variable display of the fourth symbol and stop later.

The size of the display area of the decorative symbol may be larger than the size of the display area of the fourth symbol. The size of the decorative symbol display area may be the same as the size of the fourth symbol display area display area. The size of the display area of the decorative symbol may be smaller than the size of the display area of the fourth symbol.

The variable display of the decorative symbol is composed of a plurality of symbol combinations, and the timing that can be recognized by the player may be different (reach effect etc. can be executed). For the fourth symbol, the result is informed by one or more symbols (combination), but almost all stop at the timing of fluctuation stop (reach effect etc. are not executed).

The variable display area of the fourth symbol is fixed. The variable display area of the fourth symbol may change.

The decorative pattern to be used is different depending on the game state (probability change, electric support, effect mode, etc.), or the same decorative pattern is used. The fourth symbol is different only in the fourth symbol for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for special figure 2, and does not depend on the game state or the like.

The present invention also provides
B.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The first transmissive region comprises at least a third transmissive region,
The first transmissive area is provided with at least a fourth transmissive area, and the third transmissive area is an area in front of the display area of the display means,
The fourth transparent area is an area in front of the game area and different from an area in front of the display area of the display means,
The light emission effect can be executed in a region including at least a part of the third region and at least a part of the fourth transmissive region,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
Since the light emission effect can be performed even outside the display area, the interest may be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, the shutter accessory or the glass emission is used as an example of the rendering means, but the rendering means may be one capable of emitting light outside the display area like glass emission.

The present invention also provides
B'.
1. The gaming machine described in,
A plurality of the display means are provided,
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is capable of performing at least the first display,
The second display means is capable of at least executing the second display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, the player can concentrate on paying attention to one of the display means. If you want to pay attention to the effect, you should pay attention to the first display means that is hidden by the issuance of the first transparent area, and if you want to pay attention to information, you can pay attention to the second display area that is not hidden by the first transparent area. It may be possible to focus on the display means.

Examples of the combination of the first display means and the second display means, for example,
The main liquid crystal display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) may be the first display means, and the sub liquid crystal display means (liquid crystal display device 208i) may be the second display means. The first display means and the second display means may be reversed.
The main liquid crystal display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) is the first display means, and the special figure display means (for example, special figure display, general figure display, special figure hold, general figure hold, game state display, The display means on which various information such as right-handed display is displayed may be the second display means. The first display means and the second display means may be reversed.
The sub liquid crystal display means may be the first display means and the special figure display means may be the second display means. The first display means and the second display means may be reversed.
The case where the panel lamp having an information notification function such as a mode notification is the first display means, and the liquid crystal display means for displaying the same display on various liquid crystal display means may be the second display means. is there. The first display means and the second display means may be reversed.

The present invention also provides
C.
1. The gaming machine described in,
Equipped with advance notice means that can execute advance notice at least,
The notice means is at least capable of executing the notice in connection with the light emission effect,
The notice means can execute the notice by changing a display mode of the first display (for example, overlapping the first transparent area).
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
The luminous effect can be made to function as a notice associated with the display means. Further, it may be possible to draw attention to the first display by causing it to function as a notice. For example, a change in the hold icon can be executed as a pre-reading notice, and the notice means may include the pre-reading notice means.

The present invention also provides
C'.
1. The gaming machine described in,
A win/fail judgment means capable of at least executing a win/fail judgment
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
Equipped with
The display means is capable of performing at least variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of decorative symbols during the symbol variable display once.
When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, it is possible to derive a decorative pattern mode according to the big hit in at least one decorative pattern change display of the plurality of decorative pattern change displays.
If the result of the hit determination is out, in all decorative symbol variable display of the plurality of decorative symbol variable display, it is possible to derive a decorative pattern mode according to the out
At least a part of the plurality of decorative symbol variable displays is the decorative symbol variable display is the first display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It may be possible to make the player recognize a noteworthy decorative pattern variable display while improving the interest by simultaneously displaying a plurality of decorative symbol variable displays.

It should be noted that there is a case in which a light that does not form a reach or a big hit is hidden (or made difficult to visually recognize) by the light emission effect.

In addition, the reach and the big hit part may be emphasized in the light emission effect to be noticed.

In addition, regarding various notice effects such as notice of pattern rewriting, etc. It may be applicable as the notice means described in.

(Other)
The present invention may have the following configurations.

Examples of combinations of the first display means and the second display means are as follows. Examples of the combination of the first display means and the second display means, including the above-mentioned ones, can be appropriately rearranged and combined.
-Public figure fluctuation production and public figure display means may be the first display means and the second display means mutually. In addition, the special figure variation effect and the special figure display means may be the first display means and the second display means, respectively.
There may be a case where the light emission effects partially overlap the roulette effect, one of which is the first display and the other of which is the second display. For example, the first display and the second display may be separated depending on the effect of three choices or the like.
-A combination of a predetermined notice and another predetermined notice may cause one of the notices to be the first display and the other to be the second display.
One of the notices of the same system (for example, step 1 of the step-up notice corresponds to the first display, step 2 corresponds to the second display, etc.) is the first display, and the other is the second display May be. In this case, it may be possible to draw attention to the latest notice.
The special symbol 1 of the fourth symbol may be the first display, and the special symbol 2 of the fourth symbol may be the second display. For example, during the change of the special figure 2, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 may be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emission effect, or the light emission effect may be performed in order to pay attention to the fourth symbol of the special figure 2.

Further, the present invention may have a configuration in which both the first display and the second display are overlapped by the first transmissive area (light emission effect).

The first display and the second display may be displayed on one display unit or may be separately displayed on a plurality of display units.

The phenomenon of each embodiment does not need to occur in every period. For example, even with the same reach effect (effect that is performed at the same time determined by the variation time of the special figure), the appearance rate of each notice or the like is generally not 100%. Therefore, there is a case where an effect overlapping with the first display is performed and a case where it is not performed.

In order to make the first display stand out, the first transmissive area does not necessarily have to overlap the first display due to the light emission effect. For example, it may be a light emission effect that surrounds a display that is desired to be conspicuous or a light emission effect that is specified by an arrow or the like.

Execution of the light emission effect is not limited to that performed while the symbol is changing. For example, the following timing is assumed, and an effect corresponding to the first display and the second display may be performed.
・During a big hit... There are cases where multiple indications are made due to a probabilistic effect. It is also possible to apply the part of whether or not the design is changed and the one for which the certainty change notification is made by accomplishing some mission as the first display and the second display.
・Daitomo (for example, mobile (for example, mobile phone) and game console production interlocking system) is being set... Various displays such as mission achievement and level-up display are the first and second displays related to Daitomo (first information). It is applicable as the second display.
・It is also applicable during other demos and screens after power is turned on.

The first display and the second display are not necessarily difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect. Depending on the pattern of the light emission effect, the display may be conspicuous or relatively easy to be visually recognized.

<Appendix 9>
The present invention described above,
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200) provided with at least a game area (for example, a game area 124),
Transmission means (for example, transmission member 703) provided on the front side of the game board,
A gaming machine equipped with
An irradiating unit (for example, a light source 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H) capable of irradiating at least light to the transmitting unit is provided,
The transmitting means is provided with at least a first light emitting means (for example, lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, 703de, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The transmitting means is provided with at least a second light emitting means (for example, lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, 703de, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The first light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The second light emitting means is capable of guiding at least the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The first light emitting means is at least displayable in a first mode (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The second light emitting means is at least displayable in a second mode (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The first aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
A variety of effects can be performed.

In addition, it may be possible to perform various effects.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. In the game table described in,
The game board is a display (for example, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c in FIG. 99(a), a special symbol 1 fourth symbol area 731a, a special symbol 2 fourth symbol. The area 731b, the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a) is provided with at least display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of being executed,
The transmitting means is provided at a position facing at least the display means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
In some cases, a variety of effects can be performed.

Further, the present invention is
3.
2. In the game table described in,
The display includes a first display (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 99(a)),
The first light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703v) is provided at least in front of at least a part of the first display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
It may be possible to draw attention to the display.

Further, the present invention is
4.
2. Or 3. In the game table described in,
The display includes a first display (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 99(a)),
The second light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703u) is not provided at least in front of at least a part of the first display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
By making the first display clear, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the display.

Further, the present invention is
5.
2. Through 4. In the gaming table according to any one of the above,
The display includes a second display (for example, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a in FIG. 99(a)),
The first light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703v) is not provided at least in front of the second display,
The second light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703u) is not provided at least on the front side of the second display,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
By making the second display clear, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the display.

In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by keeping the information important to the player always visible.

<Appendix 10>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Transparent means (for example, transparent member 703, transparent members 713, 714, 715);
A plurality of irradiation means (for example, light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G, 702H, LEDs 717a, 717b, 717c),
A gaming machine equipped with
The transparent means is means provided in the game board,
One of the plurality of irradiation units is a first irradiation unit (for example, light sources 702A, 702C, 702E and 702G, LEDs 717a, LEDs 717b),
Of the plurality of irradiation means, another irradiation means different from the first irradiation means is a second irradiation means (for example, light sources 702B, 702D, 702F and 702H, LED717b, LED717c),
The first irradiation means is a means configured to irradiate the transmission means with light,
The second irradiation means is a means configured to irradiate the transmission means with light,
The transmission means is irradiated with light by the first irradiation means, so that the transmission means is irradiated with the first display (for example, the pattern 703ba, 703ca, the pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717a, the LED 717b is irradiated). The pattern that is displayed by
The transmission means is irradiated with light by the second irradiation means, and thus the transmission means is irradiated with a second display (for example, patterns 703bb and 703cb, patterns displayed by illuminating the LEDs 717b, and the LEDs 717c are irradiated. The pattern that is displayed by
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Various performances can be performed.
・In addition,
The transmissive means may be composed of a plurality of transmissive parts (for example, transparent members 713, 714 and 715).
Also,
The transmissive means may be composed of one transmissive portion (for example, the transmissive member 703).
・In addition, as described in paragraph number [1049],
The first display may be configured to give a notice.
Also,
The second display may be configured to give a notice.

Here, the advance notice may be a “prefetch advance notice” or a “preliminary notice of the change”.

In addition, as described in paragraph number [0615],
The first display and the second display may be easier to display when the result of the game is a big hit than when it is a loss.
-In addition, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the first irradiation means and the second irradiation means may be located around the transmission means.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
Movable means (eg, blade accessories 711a and 711b),
Equipped with
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, variable display of decorative symbols, effect display, hold icon display, prefetch icon display, notice display, prefetch notice display, fourth symbol display),
The transmitting means is a means provided in front of the display means,
The movable means is a means provided behind the transmitting means,
The position at which the first display is displayed is a position overlapping a part of the movable means moved from the initial position,
The position where the second display is displayed is a position where it overlaps with a part of the movable means that has moved from the initial position,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
・In addition, as described in paragraph number [0619],
The first display and the second display may be erased before the stop display of the decorative pattern on the display means.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first irradiation means is a means composed of a plurality of LEDs,
The second irradiation means is a means composed of a plurality of LEDs,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is provided with a flow-down area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a region in the game area 124 in which the game balls can flow down).
The transmitting unit is a unit provided with a first direction changing unit (for example, a lens cut that forms the pattern 703ba, a lens cut that forms the pattern 703ca),
The first direction changing means is not provided in front of the flow-down area,
By irradiating the first irradiation means with light toward the first direction changing means, the first display is displayed,
The transmitting means is a means provided with a second direction changing means (for example, a lens cut forming the pattern 703bb, a lens cut forming the pattern 703cb),
The second direction changing means is not provided in front of the flow-down area,
The second display is displayed by irradiating the second irradiation means with light toward the second direction changing means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
The “front of the flow-down area” may be the glass or resin transparent plate member 118 provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106.
・In addition, as described in paragraph number [0619],
The direction changing means may be composed of a plurality of lens cuts.

Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
Both the first display and the second display may be displayed on the transmitting means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 11>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
Movable means (for example, blade role 711a, blade role 711b, blade of blade role 711a, blade of blade role 711b, ie blade 711ba),
Transparent means (for example, transparent member 703, transparent members 713, 714, 715);
A plurality of irradiation means (for example, a light source for emitting and displaying the pattern 703f, LEDs 717a, 717b, 717c),
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The transparent means is means fixed to the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, variable display of decorative symbols, effect display, hold icon display, prefetch icon display, notice display, prefetch notice display, fourth symbol display),
The transmitting means is a means provided in front of the display means,
The movable means is a means provided behind the transmitting means,
The movable means undergoes a first operation (for example, a rotational movement of the blade accessory 711b (for example, the entire blade accessory 711b that is the movable means) around the drive shaft 718), and then the first operation is performed. Is a means for performing another second operation (for example, rotational movement of the blade 711ba (for example, at least a part of the blade accessory 711b that is a movable means) around the drive shaft 719).
One of the plurality of irradiation units is a first irradiation unit (for example, a light source that causes the pattern 703f to emit light, LED717a, LED717b),
The first irradiation means is a means composed of a plurality of LEDs,
One of the plurality of irradiation means, which is different from the first irradiation means, is a second irradiation means (for example, a light source that causes the pattern 703f to emit light, LED717b, LED717c),
The second irradiation means is a means composed of a plurality of LEDs,
The first irradiation means is a means configured to irradiate the transmission means with light,
The second irradiation means is a means configured to irradiate the transmission means with light,
When the transmission means is irradiated with light by the first irradiation means, a first display (for example, a pattern displayed by irradiation of the LED 717a on the transmission means, a display displayed by irradiation of the LED 717b) is displayed. Displayed, the pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717c) is displayed,
The transmission means is irradiated with light by the second irradiation means, so that the transmission means is irradiated with the second display (for example, the pattern 703f, the pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717b, and the LED 717c). The pattern displayed by
The movable means in the initial position (for example, the position of the blade accessory 711b shown in FIG. 56(b)) performs the first operation to thereby move to the first position (for example, the blade shown in FIG. 56(c)). (Position of the accessory 711b),
The movable means in the first position (for example, the blade 711ba that is at least a part of the blade accessory 711b) moves to the second position (for example, FIG. 56D) by performing the second operation. The position of the blade 711ba shown),
In the first position, the movable means may overlap a portion of the first display,
The movable means moved to the first position may overlap a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”),
In the second position, the movable means may overlap a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”).
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Various performances can be performed.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The position where the second display (for example, the pattern 703f) is displayed does not overlap with the movable means in the initial position,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The transmitting means is a means composed of a plurality of transmitting means,
One of the plurality of transmissive means is a first transmissive means,
One of the plurality of transmissive means is a second transmissive means,
Since the first irradiating means irradiates the first transmitting means with light, the second displaying is not displayed on the first transmitting means, and only the first display is displayed. Is composed of
Since the second transmission means is irradiated with light by the second irradiation means, the second display means does not display the first display, and only the second display is displayed. Composed of,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is provided with a flow-down area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a region in the game area 124 in which the game balls can flow down).
The transmitting means includes a first direction changing means (for example, a lens cut that forms a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717a, a lens cut that forms a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717b, and an LED 717c. A lens cut that forms a pattern to be displayed by being illuminated) is provided,
The first direction changing means is not provided in front of the flow-down area,
By irradiating the first irradiation means with light toward the first direction changing means, the first display is displayed,
The transmitting means is a second direction changing means (for example, a lens cut forming a pattern 703f, a lens cut forming a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717b, and a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717c. A lens cut to form) is provided,
The second direction changing means is not provided in front of the flow-down area,
The second display is displayed by irradiating the second irradiation means with light toward the second direction changing means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
Both the first display and the second display may be displayed on the transmitting means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
6.
1. Through 5. A game table according to any one of the items,
The second display area is an area including the first display area,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
7.
1. Through 6. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is provided with movable means other than the movable means (for example, blade role object 711b and blade role object 711a).
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 12>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
Movable means (for example, blade role 711a, blade role 711b, blade of blade role 711a, blade of blade role 711b, ie, blade 711ba),
Transparent means (for example, transparent member 703, transparent members 713, 714, 715);
A plurality of irradiation means (for example, a light source for emitting and displaying the pattern 703f, LEDs 717a, 717b, 717c),
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The transparent means is means fixed to the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, variable display of decorative symbols, effect display, hold icon display, prefetch icon display, notice display, prefetch notice display, fourth symbol display),
The transmitting means is a means provided in front of the display means,
The movable means is a means provided behind the transmitting means,
One of the plurality of irradiation means is a first irradiation means (for example, a light source that causes the pattern 703f to emit light, LED717a, LED717b),
The first irradiation means is a means composed of a plurality of LEDs,
One of the plurality of irradiating means, which is different from the first irradiating means, is a second irradiating means (for example, a light source that causes the pattern 703f to emit light, LED717b, LED717c),
The second irradiation means is a means composed of a plurality of LEDs,
The first irradiation means is a means configured to irradiate the transmission means with light,
The second irradiation means is a means configured to irradiate the transmission means with light,
When the transmission means is irradiated with light by the first irradiation means, a first display (for example, a pattern displayed when the LED 717a is irradiated, a display displayed when the LED 717b is irradiated to the transmission means) is displayed. Displayed, the pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717c) is displayed,
The transmission means is irradiated with light by the second irradiation means, so that the transmission means is irradiated with a second display (for example, the pattern 703f, the pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717b, and the LED 717c). The pattern displayed by
The movable means is a means provided with a first rotation shaft (for example, a drive shaft 718),
The movable means is a means provided with a second rotation shaft (for example, a drive shaft 719) different from the first rotation shaft,
After the movable means performs an operation of rotating about the first rotation axis (hereinafter, referred to as “first rotation operation”), a part of the movable means moves around the second rotation axis. It is configured to perform a rotating operation (hereinafter referred to as "second rotating operation"),
The movable means in the initial position (for example, the position of the blade accessory 711b shown in FIG. 56(b)) performs the first rotation operation to thereby show the first position (for example, shown in FIG. 56(c)). It is configured to move to the position of the blade accessory 711b),
Part of the movable means in the first position is configured to move to the second position (for example, the position of the blade 711ba shown in FIG. 56D) by performing the second rotation operation. Has been done,
The second position is a position different from the first position,
The part of the first display is configured so that the movable means in the first position may overlap.
A part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”) is configured so that the movable unit at the first position may overlap.
A part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display area") is configured so that the movable means at the second position may overlap.
The first display area is an area included in the second display area,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Various productions can be performed.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The position where the second display (for example, the pattern 703f) is displayed is a position which does not overlap with the movable means in the initial position,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The transmitting means is a means composed of a plurality of transmitting means,
One of the plurality of transmissive means is a first transmissive means,
One of the plurality of transmissive means is a second transmissive means,
Since the first irradiating means irradiates the first transmitting means with light, the second displaying is not displayed on the first transmitting means, and only the first display is displayed. Is composed of
Since the second transmission means is irradiated with light by the second irradiation means, the second display means does not display the first display, and only the second display is displayed. Composed of,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is provided with a flow-down area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a region in the game area 124 in which the game balls can flow down).
The transmitting means includes a first direction changing means (for example, a lens cut that forms a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717a, a lens cut that forms a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717b, and an LED 717c. A lens cut that forms a pattern to be displayed by being illuminated) is provided,
The first direction changing means is not provided in front of the flow-down area,
By irradiating the first irradiation means with light toward the first direction changing means, the first display is displayed,
The transmitting means is a second direction changing means (for example, a lens cut forming a pattern 703f, a lens cut forming a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717b, and a pattern displayed by illuminating the LED 717c. A lens cut to form) is provided,
The second direction changing means is not provided in front of the flow-down area,
The second display is displayed by irradiating the second irradiation means with light toward the second direction changing means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
Both the first display and the second display may be displayed on the transmitting means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
6.
1. Through 5. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is provided with movable means other than the movable means (for example, blade role object 711b and blade role object 711a).
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 13>
The present invention is
1.
It is a game table equipped with production moving means,
The effect moving means (for example, the shielding device 246) causes the light emitting means (for example, the lens cut of the transmissive portion 246fa for displaying the pattern 246faa by light emission, the lens cut of the transmissive portion 246ga for displaying the pattern 246gaa by light emission, and the pattern 246baa by light emission display. Lens cut of the transmissive part 246ba, lens cut of the transmissive part 246ba for emitting and displaying the pattern 246bab, lens cut of the transmissive part 246da for emitting and displaying the pattern 246daa, lens cut of the transmissive part 246da for emitting and displaying the pattern 246dab, and light emission of the pattern 246aa A lens cut of the transmissive part 246aa for displaying, a lens cut of the transmissive part 246ba for emitting and displaying the pattern 246bac, a lens cut of the transmissive part 246da for emitting and displaying the pattern 246dac, and a lens cut of the transmissive part 246ca for emitting and displaying the pattern 246caa) Is a means
The light emitting unit may be configured to display a light emission display (for example, pattern 246faa, pattern 246gaa, pattern 246baa, pattern 246bab, pattern 246daa, pattern 246dab, pattern 246aaa, pattern 246dac, pattern 246caa). And
The light-emitting display may be displayed during operation of the effect moving means,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
-It is possible to provide a game table featuring movable means.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
A display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided,
The effect movable means is configured to be located in front of the display means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. The gaming machine described in,
A display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208A) is provided,
The effect moving means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 208A, the shutters 246A, 246B) is a means provided with the display means,
The light emitting means is configured to be located in front of the display means,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
4.
2. Or 3. The gaming machine described in,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
5.
4. The gaming machine described in,
The game machine according to claim 4,
The light emitting display by the light emitting means may overlap the effect display,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
6.
1. Through 5. A game table according to any one of the items,
The effect movable means is an irradiation means (for example, LEDs 720a, 720b, 720c, 721a, 721b, 721c, 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, 725d. ) Is provided,
The light emitting means is configured to display a light emission display by irradiating the light emitting means with light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
7.
6. The gaming machine described in,
The irradiation means is composed of a plurality of LEDs,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
8.
1. Through 7. A game table according to any one of the items,
The light emitting means is means for emitting non-self-luminous light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
9.
1. Through 8. A game table according to any one of the items,
The production moving means is a first production moving means,
A second effect moving means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208A, a half mirror role object 710a, a half mirror role object 710b) different from the first effect move means is provided.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
10.
9. The gaming machine described in,
The second effect movable means (for example, half mirror role object 710a, half mirror role object 710b) is a means provided with irradiation means (for example, LED717a, LED717b, LED717c),
The light emitting means (for example, the lens cut 713a, the lens cut 714a, and the lens cut 715a) is configured to display light emission display by the light emitting means when the light emitting means emits light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
11.
1. Through 10. A game table according to any one of the items,
With a door having a transparent portion,
The light emitting means is a means provided at a position where a store clerk can contact in the opened state of the door body,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
12.
1. Through 11. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
13.
1. Through 11. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 14>
The present invention is
1.
Production moving means (for example, the shielding device 246),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect movable means is configured to be located on the front side of the display means,
The production movable means is a light emitting means (for example, a lens cut of a transmissive portion 246fa for emitting and displaying the pattern 246faa, a lens cut of a transmissive portion 246ga for emitting and displaying the pattern 246gaa, a lens cut of a transmissive portion 246ba for emitting and displaying the pattern 246baa, A lens cut of the transmissive portion 246ba for emitting the pattern 246bab, a lens cut of the transmissive portion 246da for emitting the pattern 246daa, a lens cut of the transmissive portion 246da for emitting the pattern 246dab, and a lens of the transmissive portion 246aa for emitting the pattern 246aa. Cut, the lens cut of the transmissive portion 246ba that emits the pattern 246bac, the lens cut of the transmissive portion 246da that emits the pattern 246dac, and the lens cut of the transmissive portion 246ca that emits the pattern 246caa).
The light emitting means may be a means for displaying a light emission display (for example, pattern 246faa, pattern 246gaa, pattern 246baa, pattern 246bab, pattern 246daa, pattern 246dab, pattern 246aaa, pattern 246bac, pattern 246dac, pattern 246caa). ,
The display means is a means for displaying an effect display (for example, a display in the decorative pattern device 208 of FIG. 66),
By the light emission display, the effect display may be overlapped,
From the first position (for example, the positions of the left door 246b and the right door 246d in FIG. 60(c)) to the second position (for example, in the left door 246b and the right door 246d in FIG. 60(e)), Position),
The luminous display may be displayed until the effect moving means moves from the first position to the second position,
The display unit is a unit that may display a first error display (for example, the display of the error display field 208n in FIG. 110A),
During the display of the first error display, the light emission display may be displayed,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・It is possible to provide a game table with a characteristic of movable means.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The display means is a means for displaying a second error display,
During the display of the second error display, the display of the light emission display is interrupted,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first error display is a ball-out notification display,
The ball-out notification display is a display prompting a ball-out operation.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The above-mentioned light-emitting display is displayed when power is restored.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
The light emission display is continuously displayed even after the effect moving means moves to the second position,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
6.
1. Through 5. A game table according to any one of the items,
The effect movable means is an irradiation means (for example, LEDs 720a, 720b, 720c, 721a, 721b, 721c, 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, 725d. ) Is provided,
The light emitting means is configured to display the light emission display by irradiating the light emitting means with light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
7.
6. The gaming machine described in,
The irradiation means is composed of a plurality of LEDs,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
8.
6. Or 7. The gaming machine described in,
The production moving means is a first production moving means,
A second effect moving means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208A, a half mirror role object 710a, a half mirror role object 710b) different from the first effect move means is provided.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
9.
8. The gaming machine described in,
The irradiation means is a first irradiation means,
The light emitting means is a first light emitting means,
The luminous display is a first luminous display,
The second effect movable means (for example, half mirror role object 710a, half mirror role object 710b) is a means provided with a second irradiation means (for example, LED717a, LED717b, LED717c),
The second effect moving means is a means provided with a second light emitting means (for example, lens cut 713a, lens cut 714a, lens cut 715a),
The second light emitting means is a means for displaying a second light emitting display (for example, light emitting display by lens cut 713a, light emitting display by lens cut 714a, light emitting display by lens cut 715a),
The second light emitting means is configured to display the second light emitting display by irradiating the second light emitting means with light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
10.
1. Through 9. A game table according to any one of the items,
With a door having a transparent portion,
The light emitting means is a means provided at a position where a store clerk can contact in the opened state of the door body,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
11.
1. Through 10. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
12.
1. Through 10. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 15>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A transparent means (for example, a transparent member 703),
A first light emitting means (eg, light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H),
Second light emitting means (eg, light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H),
A gaming machine equipped with
The transparent means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means provided with a display area (for example, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c),
The display area is an area that can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive area of the transmissive means,
The transparent region can display a first pattern (for example, pattern 703ba, pattern 703bb, pattern 703ca, pattern 703cb),
The transparent area can display a second pattern (for example, pattern 703ba, pattern 703bb, pattern 703ca, pattern 703cb),
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first pattern is displayed,
When the second light emitting means emits light, the second pattern is displayed,
The light emitting period of the first light emitting means and the light emitting period of the second light emitting means may overlap with each other,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Providing a game console with display features.

Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
The first pattern is displayed only when the first light emitting means emits light,
The second pattern is displayed only when the second light emitting means emits light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first pattern is a pattern that is easier for a player to visually recognize than the second pattern when the first light emitting means emits light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The second pattern is a pattern that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first pattern when the second light emitting means emits light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is a board provided with effect means (for example, blade accessory 711a and 711b),
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

Further, the present invention is
6.
1. Through 5. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.

<Appendix 16>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A transparent means (for example, a transparent member 703),
A first light emitting means (for example, a light source for issuing and displaying the pattern 703e),
A second light emitting means (for example, a light source for issuing and displaying the pattern 703h),
A gaming machine equipped with
The transparent means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means provided with a display area (for example, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c),
The display area is an area that can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive area of the transmissive means,
The transparent region is capable of displaying a first pattern (eg, pattern 703e),
The transparent area can display a second pattern (for example, pattern 703h),
The first pattern is displayed only when the first light emitting means emits light,
The second pattern is displayed only when the second light emitting means emits light,
In the transparent area, a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed and a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed overlap,
The time when the first pattern is displayed is different from the time when the second pattern is displayed,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Providing a game console with display features.
Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
At another time during one pattern change, the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first pattern is a pattern that is easier for a player to visually recognize than the second pattern when the first light emitting means emits light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The second pattern is a pattern that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first pattern when the second light emitting means emits light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
The game board is a board provided with effect means (for example, blade accessory 711a and 711b),
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
6.
1. Through 5. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
<Appendix 17>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A transparent means (for example, a transparent member 703),
A first light emitting means (for example, a light source for issuing and displaying the pattern 703e),
A second light emitting means (for example, a light source for issuing and displaying the pattern 703h),
A gaming machine equipped with
The transparent means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means provided with a display area (for example, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c),
The display area is an area that can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive area of the transmissive means,
The transparent region is capable of displaying a first pattern (eg, pattern 703e),
The transparent area can display a second pattern (for example, pattern 703h),
The first pattern is displayed only when the first light emitting means emits light,
The second pattern is displayed only when the second light emitting means emits light,
In the transparent area, a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed and a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed overlap,
The time when the first pattern is displayed and the time when the second pattern is displayed are different times,
The game board is a board provided with a production means,
The rendering means is a movable means,
Part of the display means may be overlapped by the rendering means,
The rendering means may be located at a position overlapping a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed in the transparent area,
The rendering means may be located at a position overlapping a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed in the transparent area,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Providing a game console with display features.
Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
At another time during one pattern change, the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first pattern is a pattern that is easier for a player to visually recognize than the second pattern when the first light emitting means emits light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The second pattern is a pattern that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first pattern when the second light emitting means emits light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
<Appendix 18>
The present invention is
1.
A game board (for example, a game board 200),
Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A transparent means (for example, a transparent member 703),
A first light emitting means (for example, a light source for issuing and displaying the pattern 703e),
A second light emitting means (for example, a light source for issuing and displaying the pattern 703h),
A gaming machine equipped with
The transparent means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means provided with a display area (for example, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c),
The display area is an area that can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive area of the transmissive means,
The transparent region is capable of displaying a first pattern (eg, pattern 703e),
The transparent area can display a second pattern (for example, pattern 703h),
The first pattern is displayed only when the first light emitting means emits light,
The second pattern is displayed only when the second light emitting means emits light,
In the transparent area, a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed and a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed overlap,
The time when the first pattern is displayed and the time when the second pattern is displayed are different times,
The game board is a board provided with a production means,
The rendering means is a movable means,
Part of the display means may be overlapped by the rendering means,
The rendering means may be located at a position overlapping a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed in the transparent area,
The rendering means may be located at a position overlapping a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed in the transparent area,
It is possible to display a display indicating the number of holdings in a certain one of the display areas (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”),
It is possible to display a display indicating the number of holdings in a certain one area (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”) different from the first display area in the display area,
At least a part of the first display area is an area overlapping a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed,
At least a part of the first display area is an area overlapping a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed,
The second display area is an area that does not overlap the area in which the first pattern is displayed,
The second display area is an area that is not overlapped with the area in which the second pattern is displayed,
Because it is a game table characterized by that,
・Providing a game console with display features.
Further, the present invention is
2.
1. The gaming machine described in,
At another time during one pattern change, the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
3.
1. Or 2. The gaming machine described in,
The first pattern is a pattern that is easier for a player to visually recognize than the second pattern when the first light emitting means emits light.
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
4.
1. Through 3. A game table according to any one of the items,
The second pattern is a pattern that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first pattern when the second light emitting means emits light,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Further, the present invention is
5.
1. Through 4. A game table according to any one of the items,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table, which is characterized by that.
Aspects of the present invention are not limited to the individual embodiments described above, and any combination of the elements of the individual embodiments is included in the present invention, and various modifications that can be thought by those skilled in the art are also included. Therefore, the effect of the present invention is not limited to the contents described above. That is, various additions, changes and partial deletions are possible without departing from the conceptual idea and spirit of the present invention derived from the contents defined in the claims and equivalents thereof.

The game table according to the present invention can be applied to a game table represented by a pachinko machine.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Main body 200 Game board

Claims (5)

A game board,
Display means,
Transparent means,
A first light emitting means,
A second light emitting means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The transparent means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is means provided in the game board,
The display means is a means provided with a display area,
The display area is an area that can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive area of the transmissive means,
The transparent region can display a first pattern,
The transparent region can display a second pattern,
The first pattern is displayed only when the first light emitting means emits light,
The second pattern is displayed only when the second light emitting means emits light,
In the transparent area, a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed and a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed overlap,
The time when the first pattern is displayed and the time when the second pattern is displayed are different times,
The game board is a board provided with a production means,
The rendering means is a movable means,
Part of the display means may be overlapped by the rendering means,
The rendering means may be located at a position overlapping a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed in the transparent area,
The presentation means, there Ri when located at a position where the second pattern in the transmissive region is overlapped on a part of the area to be displayed,
It is possible to display a display indicating the number of holdings in a certain one of the display areas (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”),
It is possible to display a display indicating the number of holdings in a certain one area (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”) different from the first display area in the display area,
At least a part of the first display area is an area overlapping a part of the area in which the first pattern is displayed,
At least a part of the first display area is an area overlapping a part of the area in which the second pattern is displayed,
The second display area is an area that does not overlap the area in which the first pattern is displayed,
The second display area is an area that is not overlapped with the area in which the second pattern is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1,
At another time during one pattern change, the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
The first pattern is a pattern that is easier for a player to visually recognize than the second pattern when the first light emitting means emits light.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The second pattern is a pattern that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first pattern when the second light emitting means emits light,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.